Home

UNIVERSAL THREE PHASE

1. User Manual Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commande List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Modulated Waveforms Commands continued FM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 100e6 100e3 FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 100e6 1e6 DATA lt data_array gt AM FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN MODulation FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 10e3 DEPTh 0 to 100 50 SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 100 0e6 10e3 STOP 10 to 100e6 1e6 TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 DIRection UP DOWN UP SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic LIN MARKer FREQuency 10 to 100e6 505e3 FSK FREQuency SHIFted 10e 3 to 100e6 100e3 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 MARKer 1 to 4000 1 DATA lt data_array gt 5 10 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Modulated Waveforms Commands continued PSK PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 SHIFted 0 to 360 180 RATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 DATA lt data_array gt MARKer 1 to 4000 1 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 CARRier STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 Run Mode Commands INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1
2. 8101 8102 User Manual Output Type Standard Waveforms The Model 8102 can output five types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary and Modulated waveforms The various output types are described in the following paragraphs The 8102 can generate an array of standard waveforms The waveforms are generated mathematically from standard equations and converted to waveform coordinates that are downloaded to the working memory Unlike analog function generators that use electrical circuits to produce the wave shapes the 8102 must compute the waveform coordinates every time a new function is selected or every time the parameters of the function change The 8102 can produce 11 standard waveforms sine triangle square ramp and pulse sinc gaussian and exponential pulses dc and Pseudo random noise Some of the waveforms parameters can be modified such as start phase for sine and triangle duty cycle for square rise and fall times for pulses etc The standard waveforms are the most commonly used wave shapes and therefore were collected to a library of standard waveforms that can be used without the need to compute and download waveform coordinates The repetition rate of the standard waveforms is given in units of Hz Both channels share the same clock source and therefore when a standard function shape is selected for re play the frequency of the waveforms is the same at the output connectors of both channels Also when st
3. 2 Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 but observe a triangle modulating wave form Test Results Pass Fail 6 23 8101 8102 User Manual FSK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base Sampling Rate Trace A View Trigger source Amplitude 0 1 ms 50 MS s at least Jitter Type FREQ CLK Channel 2 positive slope 1 Vidiv Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chamnel 1 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulation Carrier Freq Shift Frequency Baud Rate Marker Index Sync Output Modulated FSK 2 MHz 4 MHz 10 kHz 4 On On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step FSK list with alternating 0 and 1 Test Procedure Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Squarewave Period 0 2 ms Max Freq 4 MHz Min Freq 2 MHz Test Results Pass Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 24 Performance Checks Test Procedures PSK Equipment Oscillosco
4. ci ECO TS UIC dee 8 OOOO GG ENTER MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG 0 EN vie gt gt d A A Figure 1 11 Typical Modulated waveform Display a E 2 E 1 21 8101 8102 User Manual Modulation Figure 1 12 ArbConnection Example FM Modulation Panel Modulation Off AM FM FSK 1 22 In modulation OFF the output generates continuous Carrier Waveform frequency The carrier waveform is sinewave and its frequency can be programmed using the CW Frequency menu The value programmed for the CW Frequency parameter is used for all other modulation functions The AM function enables amplitude modulation of a carrier waveform CW The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform normally referred to as envelop waveform The envelop waveform can be selected from sine triangle square or ramp shapes The FM function allows frequency modulation of a carrier waveform CW The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform normally referred to as modulating waveform The modulating waveform can be selected from sine triangle or square waveforms FSK Frequency Shift keying modulation allows frequency hops between two pre programmed frequencies Carrier Waveform Frequency and Shifted Frequency Note that CW is sinewave only and that the switch between two frequencies is always coherent PSK Sweep Modulation Run Modes Aux
5. to separate multiple commands as shown below SRST ESIB LDN 5 5 8101 8102 User Manual SCPI Parameter Type 5 6 Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters Arbitrary Block Parameters The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages numeric discrete boolean and arbitrary block Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted Engineering unit suffices with numeric parameters e g MHz or kHz can also be sent If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will ignore values which are not allowed and will generate an error message The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter VOLT AMPL lt amplitude gt Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values i e FIXed and USER They have short and long form command keywords Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters The following command uses discrete parameters SOUR FUNC MODE FIXed USER Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false The gene
6. Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start O ms Repeat 3 Li Duration x R 4155 ms 5 5 Orororor Figure 1 4 ArbConnection The Pulse Composer Introduction A detailed functional description is given following the general description of the features functions and options available with the Model 8102 The Model 8102 is a bench top 2U high half rack wide dual channel Function Arbitrary Generator a high performance instrument that provides multiple and powerful functions in one small package The 8102 generates an array of standard waveforms from a built in waveform library as well as arbitrary and modulated waveforms The generator outputs 16 bit waveforms from two channels at up to 250MS s with different waveform properties The unique design provides increased dynamic range and lower noise floor making it ideal for the generation of multi tone signals Direct Digital Synthesis DDS technology utilized in the design of the 8102 allows flexibility in usage of features like AM FM FSK PSK and sweep The DDS circuit has an independent memory that can be used as an arbitrary modulation source For example the FM feature can be stimulated by an internal source or arbitrary FM waveform allowing the production of customized chirp signals The included ArbConnection software can be used to breadboard custom frequency modulat
7. Burst ___200ns 0 000 000 00s BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC STD POS o RUN BURST SRC CHi Figure 11 Burst Run Mode Parameters in he Man The manual trigger allows you to trigger or gate the 8102 directly Us g the Manua from the front panel This button is active only when the generator is Trigger placed in external trigger only The MAN TRIG button is a second function to the Enter button and can be used only when the display is not in editing mode Using the SYNC For safety reasons every time you turn the 8102 OFF and ON the Output SYNC output defaults to OFF If you want to use the SYNC output you must turn it on immediately after you power up the generator You can turn the SYNC on using the ON OFF SYNC hot key as was explained earlier in this chapter or you can do it from the Outputs menus shown in Figure 3 12 3 22 Using the Instrument Applying Filters Channel 1 SYNC Pulse Output 7777 Output ON 4 Filter Source CH1 Position Output ON Offset Channel 2 Filter 120M CH 2 gt CH 1 1 BASE MODE SYNC OUT GATED EXT FUNC ARB POS o LEVEL zt GOU RUN GATE SRC CH1 SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 12 SYNC and Filter Parameters There are four parameters you can adjust for the SYNC output Output Turns the SYNC output on and off Note that the termination of the output state shifts the dc level to OV but leaves a low impedance path to the connector and therefore if your UUT u
8. Creating Pulses 4 50 CH1 CH2 As was mentioned above creating pulses with the pulse editor is simple and intuitive just as you would draw the pulse on a piece of paper The pulse editor then processes the information determines the appropriate mode and converts to waveform coordinates for downloading to the instrument for it to generate the required pulse shape There are a number of terms that will be used throughout the following description Make yourself familiar with these terms before you proceed with actual design of your pulse Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor is the prime tool for creating pulses To invoke the pulse editor point and click on the pulse editor icon on the pulse composer toolbar You can also invoke the editor by clicking on the Section Number icon as will be shown later in this description The pulse editor dialog box is shown in Figure 4 29 Pulse Train The Pulse Train identifies the entire pulse design When downloading the waveform to the instrument the entire pulse train will be downloaded regardless if part of the pulse train is displayed on the pulse composer screen Pulse Section Pulse train is constructed from 1 or more sections If the pulse is simple it can be created using one section only For more complex pulse train the train can be divided to smaller sections and each section designed separately for simplicity Figure 4 32 shows a complex pulse train which was made from five simp
9. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 100 to Numeric 1 Programs the exponent parameter 100 Response The 8102 will return the present exponent value 5 26 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands DC lt amplitude gt Description This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt amplitude gt 8 to 8 Numeric 5 Programs the DC amplitude parameter Response The 8102 will return the present DC amplitude value 5 27 8101 8102 User Manual Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands 5 28 This group is used to control the arbitrary waveforms and their respective parameters This will allow you to create segments and download waveforms Using these commands you can also define segment size and delete some or all unwanted waveforms from your memory Use the commande in this group to turn the digital output on and off and to download data to the digital pattern buffer Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in a dedicated waveform memory Each data point has a vertical resolution of 16 bits 65536 points e each sample is placed on the vertical ax
10. The following paragraphs describe the various modes of operation and give examples of how to program the Model 8102 The manual is organized by instrument function and instructions are given in each paragraph on how to use the function from both the front panel and ArbConnection The 8102 has two output channels Although this is a two channel instrument many of the commands that set parameters and functions are common for both channels For example sample clock and run modes can not be set separately for each channel On the other hand you may program each channel to have different function shape amplitude and offset Table 3 1 lists the function and parameters and their related Inter channel dependency The 8102 has only one sample clock source which means that waveform samples are clocked simultaneously on both channels Therefore if you are looking to have to completely separated channels with no correlation between the two signals this is not the right instrument for you However most applications for two channel generator require phase correlation between the channels and this is the way the 8102 is constructed Shared sample clock source assures that both channels start generating signals exactly on the same phase and in addition there is an assurance that there is no jitter between the two channels Inter channel phase control is described later in this chapter in the Using the Auxiliary Functions section During use ou
11. arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 23 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 159102 cni CH2 guTPUuT SYNC Wave 0 0 Shape Frequency 45 82 1000 000MHz E 1 000 000 000 MHz fi 2 800 BMS S 0 de BASE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC STD Pos o LEVEL 1 60U _ O C RUN TRIG SLOPE POSITIVE em Sirs KS ty A O K A 50N TTL 50n J MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Figure 3 5 Modifying Output Frequency 3 13 8101 8102 User Manual B Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Changing the The frequency of the sample clock will affect the output waveform only if arbitrary waveforms are generated First select an arbitrary Sample Clock waveform as described earlier and then proceed with sample clock Freq uency frequency modification Observe Figure 3 6 and modify the sample clock using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 6 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description Sample Clock PIS Amplitude 75 000 000 00 y LG ES 1 2 26 Active 19 000 000 B9MS s Segment REO 250 4 BA BASE MODE SYNC O
12. 3 6 8102 Front Panel Mesta deta 3 7 Enabling Aua tee 3 11 Selecting a Waveform e 3 12 Changing the Output Frequency ccccccececceeeseecceceneneeeandenssceneneeeeeeeeesssensseeeeeeeeteneescees 3 13 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency tica ld 3 14 Programming the Amplitude and Ottset nono nnnn cnn nana nn nn cnn 3 15 A A i eaaa ia iaaa aini A aaa a a aaa a ae ii aa 3 17 Selecting the Modulation Run Modes cil iio opina 3 18 Triggered Mode retocar 3 18 Delayed Tr ii a aiaa 3 19 RE A Ae ee els Se a Be tl 3 19 Gated MOG sas AAA Mesias A Mee eee ees A 3 20 Burst MOOG eebe a a E A A A aa 3 21 Using tre Mariel Veit Ge EE 3 22 euer the NC OIDO ini a bd 3 22 Applying ei 3 23 Generating Standard Waveforms cccccccesesesceeeeneceeeenseensdeeeneeeeeeeeeessenseeeeeeneeeeneeseees 3 24 Generating Arbitrary Et ge EEN 3 34 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms coo 3 35 Generating Arbitrary WaveforMs ococcccccccccccnncnnnncnnccnnnononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnncnnnannananas 3 35 Generating Modulated Waveforms sax stsucinisctecttedaladaled civ ho oeihesartieu tape aatetepecectuaasesedane 3 37 8101 8102 User Manual LEE E E 3 39 A 3 41 Pill id 3 42 A eeh Eech eech ee 3 44 DWECD O ele eee de Raed E ode 3 46 USING the Auxiliary FUNCI N CEET 3 47 Using the Digital Pulse Generator cccccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeneee 3 47 Pulse Generator Menus ioorasitini oidre cian nagtndadangeedah ciar lia
13. Contents continued Connecting to a Remote interface ke 2 7 Selecting a Remote interface ENNEN 2 7 GPIB CONIQUI DE 2 8 USB Gomis AAA 2 9 LAN Configura sais A R 2 15 Choosing a Static IP AQUreSS EE 2 17 Using The Instructora o 3 1 DIEA A EE E 3 3 Inter Channel Dependency ke 3 3 Inter Channel Phase Dependency Zus A n ii a in cid 3 3 Ouiput Simi us 3 3 Input Output Protection A tou leee cen atooastetu econ aceite Mean caee lend ute tec eattengt ee eaesaweees 3 4 Power On Reset Defaults EE 3 4 Controlling the 81 ccoo la 3 6 8102 Front Panel A eee SEAS eae eae 3 7 Enabling the Outputs x atada allioli idad 3 11 Selecting a Waveform Type EE 3 12 Changing the Output Frequency EEN 3 13 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency EEN 3 14 Programming the Amplitude and COfteet kee 3 15 Selecting a Run MOG uc a ara re 3 17 Selecting the Modulation RUN Mode 3 18 Triggered MOJO seconds iria 3 18 Delayed TQ eun a a Ri A aa 3 19 A ere ei cee ene Re Ri cee Arr r ne A the meet etree E eee 3 19 LOC Ne TE 3 20 BITS usina in o do ee 3 21 Using the Manual Trigger sico daria 3 22 Using the A E 3 22 Applying Fites e a a il clio 3 23 Generating Standard WaveformS iii resene ger 3 24 Generating Arbitrary WaveformS ini 3 34 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms oooooocccccnnnccoonccccnccnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 35 Generating Arbitrary Waveiorms ANEN 3 35 Generating Modulated Waveforms AAA 3 37 EE ee ee EE ne eet ner ape ore 3 38 iii
14. OPC is used for synchronization between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue The OPC query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register ESR Reading the response to the OPC query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument However both the system bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold off state while the controller is waiting to read the OPC query response OPT Returns the value 0 for a 8102 with no options RST Resets the generator to its default state Default values are listed in Table 5 1 SRE lt enable_value gt Enables bits in the Status Byte enable register SRE Query the Status Byte enable register The generator returns The SCPI Status Registers The Status Byte Register STB Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries a decimal value in the range of 0 to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 RSQ cannot be set The binary weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register STB Query the Status Byte summary register The STB command is similar to a serial poll but is processed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll but the request service bit bit 6 is not cleared if a seria
15. Setup 25 1V Amplitude Output Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through 7 17 8101 8102 User Manual termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP23 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 26 500mV Amplitude Output Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Ch Amplitude 500mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP24 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV Setup 27 100mV Amplitude Output Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 810
16. Writing Ge WE te 4 36 Equation CONVENIO EE 4 37 beleet e ad ads a o a o a 25 de 4 38 EQUATION Samples inet E E a AEE AA ER RN 4 39 COMBINING Waveform Ss srira O eas 4 43 The Pulse Composer unicidad 4 45 The Command Edition a a a roto delas dido 4 63 Logging SCPICOMMaANAS EE 4 63 4 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction to ArbConnection Installing ArbConnection ArbConnection 4 What s in This Chapter This Chapter contains information how to install invoke and use ArbConnection Introduction to ArbConnection and examples how to program instrument controls and parameters and how to generate waveforms and download them to the 8102 are also given in the following sections In general AroConnection is a utility program that serves as an aid for programming the Model 8102 ArbConnection has many functions and features of which all of them share a common purpose controlling 8102 functions from remote As minimum to use ArbConnection you ll need the following tools 1 Computer Pentium Ill or better Windows 2000 XP or higher High resolution screen at least 1024 x 768 pixels Pointing device mouse or ball Visa 2 6 or higher installation A e DS Last but not least some basic knowledge how to operate computers and Windows based programs ArbConnection operation is divided into two main functions 1 Front panel control and 2 Waveform generation and editing These operating options are described in this c
17. 10MHz gt 400Bc MI 10m TT 50MHz gt 30dBc 10M z00M III 100 MHz gt 25dBc 10M 250M Sinewave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Amplitude 6V Output On Frequency Initially 1 KHz then as required by the test Test Procedure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DAC waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6 12 6 11 8101 8102 User Manual Table 12 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test 8102 Sine Oscilloscope Reading Frequenc Error Limits 10 MHz 6 0 15 Divisions 50 MHz 6 1 2 Divisions dl T 100 MHz 6 1 2 Divisions TTT Sinewave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitude 6V Output On CW Frequency Initially 1 kHz then as required by the test Test Procedure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 div
18. 8101 8102 User Manual RA 3 39 A EE 3 41 Sada ii a Cee gt epee ee ae 3 42 O 3 44 O EE 3 46 Using the Auxiliary Eer Sins N ED Io 3 47 Using the Digital Pulse Generator 3 47 Pulse Generator Menus A ee en ee neen 3 50 Pulse Design LIMON SS italia eege dE deeg 3 52 Understanding the Basics of Phase Offset between Channel 3 53 Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard WaveformS A 3 54 Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary Waveforms oooooooooccccnnnccccnnnoncancnnnnnnnnanancncnnnno 3 56 Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated Waveiorms AA 3 56 Customizing the Output UNITS vc ir 3 56 Selecting the Horizontal Units ee 3 56 Adjusting Load Re ee EE 3 57 Monitoring the Internal Temperature ENNEN 3 57 4 ge le Vu aman sme ins 4 1 Witat s In TAS CAPI a EA A AS 4 3 Introduction to ArbConnection EE 4 3 Installing ArboConnection EE 4 3 COUITHGPAT DG ORIG CTO i562 lia ca 4 4 For the New and Advanced Leer ENNEN 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 TheOpening SCre oN zeia a Medusa cade A a Gals eh ade Gane oneness 4 5 ArbGonnection Features cositas a it att 4 6 The eegen 4 6 The Operation PanelS foo sig seed sal secs dilo Set dEr dal vast delevesd esl lleida i 4 8 RE 4 8 ee A rent Em er oe eee a re 4 10 ere hl dr a da Ss tt ha ee ea nce chad state Oh 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table om occcnnnnnicninnnnccconnoncrccnnn nacer 4 13 A E cea E aD E ded NED ee 4 15 Ree Ier 4 16 A A Pe ea Ce Nite cle ae 4 17 PAN chest gcse tsi io id 4 18
19. CH1 and CH2 Parameters The Parameters group has two parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset and a phase offset parameter that defines the phase shift of CH2 in respect to CH1 To access the required parameter click on the LED or the text next to it to display the required parameter The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 HI keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading Function The Function group is used for selecting between function types The 8102 provides four types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary and Modulated By pressing one of these buttons output waveform will change to the selected option The default function type is Standard If you want to change standard waveform parameters you can select Standard from the Panels bar Run Mode The Run Mode group is used for selecting the active run mode for the instrument You can select between continuous triggered gated and burst modes There is no additional panel associated with the continuous mode but if you press one of the other run mode options you ll be able to adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger Panel ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels 4 9 8101 8102 User Manual Standard 4 10 CH1 Waveforms Output Control The Output Control group controls the state of the ma
20. CW Frequency defines the frequency of the carrier waveform Using this standard AM function the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine Trigger Baseline defines the idle state of the AM output when placed in trigger mode There are two options continuous carrier or dc level The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered generates the AM waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform Selecting dc the output generates dc level until triggered Generates the AM waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform 3 39 8101 8102 User Manual Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Offset defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Modulation Type Modulation Shape pi Modulation Depth Modulation Frequency BAS MODE CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS 6 CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Figure 18 AM Menus Modulation Type Modulation Triangle Shape o Modulation Depth Modulation Frequency FUNC MOD POS amp CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CHL MODULATION ON Figure 19 Modulating Waveform Shapes CONTINUOU 3 40 FM Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms The FM function allows frequency modulation of a ca
21. Design Units Y ms Section Start U ms Repeat fi Gepplo Duration x A _0 ms Pulse currently not specified Figure 4 35 Using the Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor as shown in Figure 4 35 has four groups Section Structure Pulse Train Design Format Section Properties and control buttons These groups are described below Pulse Train Design Format There are two methods or formats that can be use for designing the pulse shape DC Intervals and Time Level Points The design format is unique for the current section and cannot be switched during the section design DC Intervals programs pulse duration using DC levels only Transition times for this format are at the maximum rate that the generator can produce For example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has OV to 3 3V amplitude 50 duty cycle and 1ms period you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 2 Level 0 Time Interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Time Level Points programs pulse turning points using level and time markers This format is a bit more complex to use however it allows pulse design that require linear transition times
22. IEC61000 3 2 2001 Am1 Harmonics IEC61000 3 3 2002 Am1 Flickers 1EC61000 4 2 2001 Am1 Am2 ESD Contact Discharge 4Kv Air Discharge 8Kv IEC61000 4 3 2002 Am1 Radiated immunity 3V m 80MHz 1000MHz IEC61000 4 4 2001 Am2 Electrical Fast Transient and Burst 1 0kV 5KHz IEC61000 4 5 2001 Am1 Surges DM 1 0kV CM 2 0Kv IEC61000 4 6 2003 Current injection immunity 3Vrms IEC61000 4 8 2001 Magnetic field 1Amper IEC61000 4 11 2001 Voltage dips and variation Models 8101 and 8102 are built on the same platform and share specifications and features except the 8101 is a single channel version and while the 8102 has two channels The tests were performed on a typical configuration Chapter Table of Contents Title Page Getting tarted iii lidia 1 1 TEE e 1 3 Nro du soii Seed eupebaedlewess A E Ott E E E 1 3 8102 Feature Highlights EN 1 3 ArbConnection Feature Hoblohts cn cnnnncnnnnnnn nn ncnnnnnn 1 4 NUCA A sbad 1 6 Safety Considerations a an e did dial ek ios dai ek das 1 8 el siele Re aereos das 1 8 Spec CAMAS uti rd e a 1 8 Functional Description DEE 1 9 Front Panel Connectors and Indicators AEN 1 9 Main Output Channels AZ vascos 1 9 SYNG Q tp t a eee a a O De st o is 1 9 Front Panel Control oi da 1 9 Rear Panel Input amp Output Connectors ENNEN 1 12 TRIGIN ara EE 1 12 REPIN cuore 1 13 AN au EES ETE CMIEE PSE SrA 1 13 LEE 1 13 CPU is Baas ps GS cts Sac pees nach a een opt teacl Sata aaia wee Ae Aa r aAa Munk en aa ety 1
23. L Anchor 567 Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 122Pts 12 2Pts Div The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the waveform area The View commands include Zoom In Zoom Out Hide Show Toolbars and Channel Y waveforms Description of the view commands is given in the following Zoom In The zoom in command operates between anchors Anchors are marked as left and right hand triangles The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform To move an anchor to a new location click and hold on the triangle and drag the anchor to left or right as required If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left the area between the anchors will zoom in as you select this command Looking at the Waveform Map as shown in Figure 4 17 you ll see that the white portion is the zoomed area Click and hold on the white area and move your cursor around and the waveform screen will be updated accordingly wad lo xi R Anchor 688 4 30 Figure 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform Segments While zoomed in you can perform Autoline and sketch editing or zoom in further by clicking and holding the mouse at one corner and releasing the mouse button at the other corner Zoom Out The zoom out restores the screen to display the complete waveform ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Channel 1 The Channel 1 Waveform command updates the waveform
24. Simply look at the display of the standard waveform You may not control the sample clock frequency when you use standard waveforms however the display provides information on the internal SCLK setting and you may find out how many waveform points are used by looking at the SYNC line below the waveform icon With this information you can now compute your phase offset resolution Now navigate to the Outputs menu as shown in figure 3 31 you can see the Offset Channel 2 field CH2 gt CH1 delay is programmed in units of waveform points Use the examples above to compute how many degrees are represented by each waveform point and enter the phase offset you wish to program If you program any value besides 0 the start of channel 2 output will be delayed for an interval set by the following relationship Offset Channel 2 n x 1 sclk Or if you prefer to use phase offset in degrees compute your phase offset resolution from the following relationship Phase Offset Resolution 360 n where n wave points And then multiply n by the value you program in the CH2 gt CH1 field Using the Instrument Pulse Design Limitations Channel 1 Output as Filter Output ON Source CH1 4 Position Channel 2 Output OFF Filter ONE Offset Channel 2 sen CH 2 gt CH 1 1 BASE MODE CONTINUOUS SYNC OUT FUNC STD POS o CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRE CHi PATTERN OFF Figure 31 Programm
25. There are four sub group parameters in the equation editor plus control buttons and equation field These parts are described below Anchor The anchors define start and end point of which the equation will be generated By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal time scale however the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations Start defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point End defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 14 bits of vertical resolution That means that the equation is computed resolved and generated with 1 32 768 increments and accuracy The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases 1 when the amp parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto Information on these two operations is given later Max defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points L
26. To turn the FM function on and off click on the FM button in the Modulation group The various controls in the FM group are described below Standard FM Parameters Allow adjustment of the parameters that are associated with the standard modulating waveform The controllable parameters are Modulation Deviation and the Marker Frequencies Mod Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform If you do not need exotic waveforms you can use one of the built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square or Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range Figure 4 8 the FM Panel 4 17 8101 8102 User Manual AM 4 18 Freq Hz Modulation Although both channels are set to output amplitude modulations simultaneously each channel can be programmed to be modulated using a unique envelop waveform There are two sets of identical parameters for each channel as discussed in the following paragraphs CH1 CH2 Mod Wave There is a list of 4 waveforms that can be selected to modulate the carrier waveform CW These are sine triangle square and ramp The frequency and amplitude of the modulating waveforms are programmable Freq Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform Note that the frequency setting must be smaller than the CW frequency for the AM function to operate correctly Although two frequency parameters are shown on this panel the frequency of the modulating waveform
27. or from stop to start DOWN frequencies Sweep time does not affect the sweep direction and frequency limits At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform normally maintains the sweep stop frequency setting but will maintain the start frequency if the DOWN option is selected except if the 8102 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Type Default Description UP Discrete UP Selects the sweep up direction DOWN Discrete Select the sweep down direction Response The 8102 will return UP or DOWN depending on the selected direction setting 5 43 8101 8102 User Manual SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Description This specifies the sweep step type Two options are available logarithmic or linear In linear the incremental steps between the frequencies are uniform throughout the sweep range Logarithmic type defines logarithmic spacing throughout the sweep start and stop settings Parameters Name Type Default Description LINear Discrete LIN Selects the linear sweep spacing LOGarithmic Discrete Select the logarithmic sweep spacing Response The 8102 will return LIN or LOG depending on the selected spacing setting SWEep MARKer lt frequency gt Description This function programs marker frequency position Sweep marker can be placed in between the start and the stop frequencies The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Defau
28. such calibration you ll need to be trained and certified by Tabor Electronics Information how to access the calibration panel and how to perform the calibration is given in Chapter 7 The picture below is just for reference how the calibration panel will look after you gain access to this panel ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Figure 4 14 the Utility Panel The Composers tab provides access to a group of composers that The Composers allow generation and editing of arbitrary waveforms and pulse Panels shapes Without utilities such as the above the operation of an arbitrary waveform generator is extremely limiting There are two waveform composers built into AroConnection Wave for generating arbitrary waveforms Arbitrary waveforms can be generated from standard libraries from an equation editor or imported to the composer from external utilities such as MatLAB The waveforms can be edited and stored on hard or soft disks Pulse for generating complex pulse trains Unlike a standard pulse generator you can design and edit multiple pulse trains with linear transitions and variable amplitudes Pulse The Composers set of panels are shown in Figure 4 15a Each of Figure 4 15a the the composers is described below Composers Panels The Wave Composer Being an arbitrary waveform generator the 8102 has to be loaded with waveform data before it can start generating waveforms The waveform generation and editing
29. 0ooov ox2omv This tests the characteristics of the square waveform lt includes Squarewave transition times aberrations and skew between channels Each Characteristics channel has its own set of amplifiers and attenuators and therefore the characteristics are tested on each channel separately Squarewave Checks Equipment Oscilloscope 50 Q 20 dB attenuator feed through Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB attenuator feed through at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 10 V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Squarewave Characteristics tests on both channels using Table 6 8 6 8 Performance Checks Test Procedures Table 8 Square wave Characteristics Parameter Oscilloscope Reading Tested Error Limits Rise Fall Time Ringing lt 6 10 mV Over undershoot lt 6 10 mV Skew Between Equipment Oscilloscope 50 Q 20 dB attenuator feed through Channels Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 500 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope 50 ohms input Use two identical cables to connect with Ch1 2 Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Waveform Arbitrary SCLK 250 MS s Amplitude
30. 1 Perform trigger and gate tests using Tables 6 14 2 Configure the counter to TOTB Measurements and perform burst tests using Tables 6 14 Set counter trigger level to 100mV Table 14 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics 8102 Run External Trigger Oscilloscope Reading Mode Pulse Fail Triggered 1 MHz Continuous Triggered waveform Triggered waveform 1 MHz Continuous Gated Waveform Gated Waveform EE ll Single shot Burst 1e6 waveforms Burst 1e6 waveforms Mixed Trigger Equipment Oscilloscope function generator AroConnection Advance Test Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Run Mode Single 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 8101 8102 User Manual Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 100 kHz Run Mode Continuous Wave TTL Square from the main output Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector Configure the 8102 channel 1 only as follows Frequency 28 MHz Waveform Sinewave Run Mode Burst Burst Count 5 counts each channel Trigger Delay On Delay 5s Amplitude 5V Trigger Source Mixed Output On Test Procedure 1 2 3 Note that no signal is shown on the oscilloscope From ArbConnection press the MAN TRIG button Note and record the time that lapsed from when you pressed MANUAL
31. 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 10MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP82 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 20MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 20MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 83 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 30MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 30MHz Setup 45 Setup 46 Setup 47 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 84 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 37 3333333MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination
32. 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Duty Cycle programs the square wave duty cycle pulse width to period ratio The duty cycle is programmed as percent of the period The default value is 50 Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters Resets the square wave parameters to their original factory defaults Triangle Wave The triangle waveform is a commonly used waveform The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore the triangle waveform is generated with 1000 points accuracy
33. 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically up to a point where filters are being switched in to reconstruct the waveform The technique of generating sine waves above certain frequency is not within the scope of this manual however one should remember that above certain frequency the waveform is loosing purity and quality because the number of points that are available to construct the waveform are inversely proportional to the output frequency This statement is true for all standard waveforms and this is the reason for limiting the upper frequency of certain waveforms There are certain menus that provide access to sine waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the sine waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parame
34. 500 cables equal length 1 5 S s to 250 MS s 300 MS s typically at 25 C 1 5 S s to 225 MS s 10 digits Same as reference gt 0 0001 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance over a 19 C to 29 C temperature range 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1ppm year aging rate 10 MHz Rear Panel BNC 10 KQ 5 TTL 50 2 duty cycle or 500 5 0 dBm selectable using an internal jumper 8101 8102 User Manual Amplitude Characteristics Amplitude 32 mV to 32 Vp p output open circuit 10 mV to 16 Vp p into 500 Resolution 4 digits Accuracy measured at 1kHz into 500 DC Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Run Modes Description Continuous Triggered Burst Gated Mixed Trigger Characteristics Trigger Sources External BUS External Trigger Input Impedance Trigger Level Range Resolution Sensitivity Damage Level Frequency Range Slope Minimum Pulse Width System Delay Trigger input to waveform output Trigger Delay Trigger input to waveform output Resolution 12 V to 16 Vp p 2 1 6 V to 11 99 Vp p 1 70 mV 160 mV to 1 599 Vp p 1 10 mV 16 mV to 159 9 mVp p 1 5 mV Oto 8 V 1mV 1 1 from Amplitude 5 mV Define how waveforms start and stop Run modes description applies to all waveform types and functions except where noted Continuous operation is specified across the entire sample clock frequency range Other run modes are limited to 225MS s Continuously free
35. 6V Output On Test Procedure 1 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform both channels Wavelength 1024 Waveform Square 2 Measure the skew between the channels to be less than ins 3 Program the skew from 1 to 10 and check the phase offset between channels is increased by 4 ns with every offset step Test Results Pass Fail This tests the characteristics of the sine waveform lt includes Sinewave ZEN distortions spectral purity and flatness Each channel has its own set Characteristics of amplifiers and attenuators and therefore the characteristics are tested on each channel separately Tests are done for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms 6 9 8101 8102 User Manual Sinewave Equipment Distortion Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer and Distortions DAC EE Output Preparation 1 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the distortion analyzer input Configure the 8102 as follows SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength As required by the test Waveform Sinewave Test Procedure 1 Perform Sinewave distortion tests on both channels using Table 6 9 Table 9 Sinewave Distortion DAC Output Tests 8102 SCLK Sinewave 8102 Reading Distortion Settings Points Frequenc Limits Leg EE p
36. ArbConnection USB driver and some other utilities to aid you with the operation of the instrument For bench operation all that you need from the CD is this manual however it is recommended that you stow away the CD in a safe place in case you ll want to use the 8102 from a host computer or in a system The V driver is a useful utility that provides standard communication and commands structure to control the 8102 from remote Programming examples are also available to expedite your software development The IVI driver comes free with the 8102 however you ll need the IVI engine and visa32 dll run time utilities to be able to use the IVI driver The additional utilities can be downloaded for free from NI s National instrument web site www ni com ArbConnection is a user friendly program that lets you control Controlling the Instrument from Remote Connecting to a Remote interface Configuring the Instrument 2 Controlling the Instrument from Remote instruments functions and features from a remote computer It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms on the screen build sequence tables modulating signals and much more and then download the signals to your 8102 without the hustle of writing complex programs and utilities This is also a great tool for you to experiment simple or complex command string to gain experience before you write your own code ArbConnection has a command editor feature that allows direct
37. Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles BOOTP mode on and off When on the IP address is administrated automatically by the system Response The 8102 will return O or 1 depending on the present BOOTP setting 5 63 8101 8102 User Manual SYSTem IP GATeway lt gate_adrs gt Description This command programs the gateway address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt gate_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the gateway address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current gateway address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following 0 0 0 0 SYSTem IP HOSTname lt name gt Description This command programs the host name address for LAN operation The programming is performed in the factory and it is highly suggested that users do not change the host name without first consulting a Tabor customer service person Parameters Name Type Description lt name gt String Programs the host name for LAN operation Response The 8102 will return a string containing the host name String length is 16 characters SYSTem KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to toggle the keep alive mode on and off The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout
38. Each main menu provides access to sub menus as summarized in Tables 3 2 to 3 5 Note that the description in these tables is given for general understanding of what is available in terms of operating the instrument For detailed instructions check the appropriate section of the manual 3 7 8101 8102 User Manual Table 2 Front Panel Waveform Menus Soft TOP 2 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes A Waveform Provides access to initial selection of the waveform type Selects from Standard Arbitrary Sequenced and Modulated A Standard A Wave Shape Select from a wave shapes list B Frequency Programs standard waveform frequency C Amplitude Programs output amplitude D Offset Programs output amplitude offset 1D 5 Phase Parameters depend on selected shape JD Reset Parameters Resets parameters for this waveform only B Arbitrary A Sample Clock Programs sample clock frequency B Amplitude Programs output amplitude C Offset Programs output amplitude offset D Active Segment Selects the active arbitrary waveform segment JD Wave Composer Provides access to the waveform composer JD Delete Segments D Modulated A Off Modulation Type Selects from Off AM FM FSK PSK and Sweep B Off CW Frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency C Off Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude D AM Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset B AM
39. Generator has been found and software driver installed However the process does not end at this point but continues to assign a logical port address to the USB driver After you click on Finish the Found New Hardware message appears however this time it has found a USB serial port as shown in Figure 2 8 i Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Figure 2 8 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Proceed with the installation till a logical drive is assigned to the USB port The process is very similar to what you have done before just select the path and options in the next dialog box and click on Next as shown in Figure 2 9 With Service Pack 2 only you ll be prompted with a Windows Logo Warning message as shown in figure 2 10 advising you that the software has not been verified for its compatibility with Windows XP Click on Continue Anyway To complete the process click on Finish as shown in Figure 2 11 8101 8102 User Manual Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search d drivers usb v O Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver
40. ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and OFF 8101 8102 User Manual Rear Panel Input 8 Output Connectors TRIG IN The 8102 has a number of connectors on its rear panel These connectors are described below Figure 1 6 shows rear panel plugs indicators connectors and other parts In general the trigger input is used for stimulating output waveforms at the main output connector s The trigger input is inactive when the generator is in continuous operating mode When placed in trigger gated or burst mode the trigger input is made active and waits for the right condition to trigger the instrument The trigger input is edge sensitive i e it senses transitions from high to low or from low to high Trigger level and edge sensitivity are programmable for the trigger input For example if your trigger signal rides on a dc level you can offset the trigger level to the same level as your trigger signal thus assuring correct threshold for the trigger signal The trigger level is adjustable from 5V to 5V The trigger input is common to both channels Therefore if the 8102 is placed in trigger mode both channels share the same mode and the trigger input causes both channels to start generating waveforms at the same time Phase relationship between channels is tightly controlled in trigger mode and therefore you should expect both channels to start generating waves with exactly
41. Oscillator Adjustment Equipment Counter Function Generator BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50Q DC Function TIA gt B Slope B Negative 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect an external function generator to the rear panel TRIG IN connector 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 01 Rise Fall Time 0 High Time 99 99 5 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Retrigger Mode On Retrigger Delay 20us 6 Using an external function generator manually trigger the 8102 Adjustment 1 Adjust C18 for a period of 20us 5 Setup 10M 10MHz TCXO Frequency Equipment Counter BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Termination 500 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the counter input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 10MHz Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 2V Wave Square Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP57 for counter reading of 10MHz 2Hz Channel 1 The following procedures pertain to the channel 1 output only Adjustments Therefore make sure that your connections are made to the channel 1 connectors 7 7 8101 8102 User Manual Base Line Offset Adjustments Setup 1 Setup 2 Setup 3 7 8 The base line offset adjustments assure that
42. Output 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Output On Test Procedure 1 Toggle 8102 trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 2 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 8102 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail Trigger Level Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 1V 4 Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the 8102 as follows 6 17 8101 8102 User Manual Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Trigger level OV Ch1 Output On Test Procedure 1 2 Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced ai ms Modify the function generator offset to 2 V and change the 8102 trigger level to 4 V Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0 1ms Modify the function generator offset to 2 V
43. adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 6 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP20 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 23 100mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 7 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP21for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Setup 24 50mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 8 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP22 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV
44. adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading Arbitrary The Arbitrary panel as shown in Figure 4 5 is invoked by pressing the Arb button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary Panel from the Panels menu the 8102 will not change its output type On the other hand if you select the arbitrary from the Main Panel the 8102 will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below Parameters The Parameters group contains three parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset Actually the values exhibited in this group are exactly the same as in the Main Panel so every time you change amplitude and offset in the Parameters group the other panels are updated automatically The segment parameter provides access to the active segment for each channel To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is 4 11 8101 8102 User Manual 4 12 Amplitude 4 Parameters associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading Figure 4 5 the Arbitrary Panel SCLK The SCLK Sample Cloc
45. adjustments for Channel 1 and Channel 2 so make sure that the output cables are connected to the appropriate channel during the adjustments The numbers that are associated with each adjustment are identified as Setup Number at the title of each of the adjustments in the following procedure Remote adjustments have the range of 1 through 256 with the center alignment set to 128 Therefore if you are not sure of the direction set the adjustment to 128 and add or subtract from this value If you have reached 1 or 256 and were not able to calibrate the range there is either a problem with the way you measure the parameter or possibly there is a problem with the instrument In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarifications and support Note in the following procedures that although configuration of the 8102 is done automatically some of the configuration is shown for reference There is no requirement to change configuration of the 8102 during the remote adjustment procedure except in places where specifically noted Use this procedure to adjust the reference oscillators The reference oscillators determine the accuracy of the output frequency so if you suspect that there is an accuracy issue proceed with the calibration of the reference oscillators Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 50M 50MHz Gated
46. and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments The following procedures pertain to the channel 2 output only Therefore make sure that your connections are made to the channel 1 connectors The base line offset adjustments assure that the AC signal is symmetrical around the OV line Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue Amplifier Offset Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CAL SERV 3 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 3 for DMM reading of OV 20mV Pre Amplifier Offset Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CAL SERV 4 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP4 for DMM reading of OV 5mV 7 29 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 3 Setup 4 Setup 5 7 30 Base Line Offset Low Range Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana
47. and change the 8102 trigger level to 4 V Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0 1ms Test Results Pass Fail Modulated Waveforms Characteristics FM Standard Waveforms 6 18 This tests the operation of the modulation circuits It includes tests for the various modulation functions FM AM FSK PSK and Sweep Since the run modes are common to all modulation functions they are being tested on the FM function only The tests are performed on each channel Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base Sampling Rate Trace A View Trigger source Amplitude 50 us 50 MS s at least Jitter Type FREQ CLK Channel 2 positive slope 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chamnel 1 3 Connect the 8102 channel 2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulation Carrier Freq Mod Frequency Deviation Sync Output Test Procedure Modulated FM 1 MHz 10 kHz 500 kHz On On 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Performance Checks Test Procedures Waveform Sine Frequency 10 kHz Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify 8102 modulating waveform to triangle then square and ramp and v
48. bear in mind that the 8102 is a digital instrument and that standard waveforms are created from lookup tables or computed from equations The lookup tables or equations are converted to waveform coordinates placed in the arbitrary waveform memory and then clocked to the DAC with the sample clock generator The frequency of the output waveform is computed from the relationship of two parameters sample clock frequency and number of points Output Frequency SCLK number of waveform points As you probably already realize the sample clock has a finite frequency 250 MS s in the case of the 8102 And therefore to reach high frequencies the number of points is reduced proportionally For example consider output frequency of 25 MHz there are only 10 points available to create the shape of the waveform With the above information on hand we can deduct that if we want to phase offset one channel in reference to another the number of waveform points determine the resolution of the phase steps For example for a 250 kHz sine wave the number of points that are required to generate the waveform is 1000 So phase offset can be programmed with resolution of 360 1000 0 36 On the other hand at 25 MHz the number of points that are required to generate the waveform is 10 So phase offset can be programmed with resolution of 360 10 36 So how do you figure out how many waveform points are used and what is the best resolution you may get
49. discussed later in this chapter Below you will find a list of all pulse parameters that you ll be able to access though the soft key menus 3 49 8101 8102 User Manual Pulse Generator Menus 3 50 Apply Changes This by far is the most important key to understanding the pulse generation process The 8102 is actually an arbitrary waveform generator not a pulse generator however with some firmware changes the same memory that is being used by the arbitrary waveform function can be converted to design pulse shapes In this case every change of pulse period parameter or transition requires re computation of the pulse shape and download sequence to the arbitrary waveform memory The process is critical to assure that the pulse design was done within the legal boundaries and generation capabilities of the model 8102 To avoid multiple design conflicts and tedious exploration of why a pulse cannot be designed with this or that parameter the Apply Changes button makes the choice only once at the end of the pulse design Therefore always make sure that after you complete the design of your pulse press the Apply Changes soft key button to end the design process and to route the new pulse design to the output terminal Period The period defines the repetition rate of the pulse The period is programmable from 80 ns Delay The delay defines the time the pulse is delayed from its start to the first transition The delay time is co
50. done Point and click on the Memory Partition A dialog box as shown in Figure 4 6 will pop up 4 13 8101 8102 User Manual 4 14 Memory Partition Table x Segm No Segment Size Append 1 1000 2 2000 3 436 4 24 Clear All Cancel Figure 4 6 the Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segment number and segment size The Seg No segment number is an index field that has values only from 1 to 2048 The Segment Size is always associated with the segment number You can program any segment size from 16 to 512k Use the Append key to add a segment at the end of the segment list If you highlighted a segment the Append key turns automatically to insert Use the Insert key to insert a segment at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a segment at the cursor position The Clear All key will remove all segments from the table and will let you start designing your segment table from fresh Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen The Save key saves the current session so you can start the Memory Partition table from the same point after you close this session The Download key updates the 8102 with the present segment table settings Y TIP The Memory Partition table does not download waveforms Use the memory partition table only if you merg
51. first being a 1000 point waveform and the second with 100 points If you delete segment 1 you can reprogram another waveform to segment 1 with size to 1000 points If you reprogram segment 1 with 1004 points the instrument will generate an error and will not accept this waveform On the other hand if you delete segment 2 which was the last segment you programmed then you can reprogram this segment with waveforms having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the segment number of which will be deleted number gt integer only TRACe DELete ALL Description This command will delete all segments and will clear the entire waveform memory This command is particularly important in case you want to de fragment the entire waveform memory and start building your waveform segments from scratch Y TIP The TRAC DEL ALL command does not re write the memory so whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery The TRAC DEL ALL command removes all stop bits and clears the segment table You can recover memory segments by using the TRAC DEF command You can also use this technique to resize or combine waveform segments TRACe SELect lt segment_number gt Description This command will select the active waveform segment for the output By selecting the active segment you are performing two function 1 Successiv
52. for modulated waveforms For example the waveform baseline where the output idles for arbitrary waveforms in triggered mode is always a dc level but for modulated waveforms you can select from dc level or continuous carrier waveforms The differences are explained in the relevant sections however you do have to remember that after you select the run mode it affects every waveform output regardless from where you programmed the mode Summary of run modes and optional trigger sources are listed in Table 1 1 Information in this table also identifies legal run modes and lists possible setting conflicts In normal continuous mode the selected waveform is generated continuously at the selected frequency amplitude and offset Only when operated from a remote interface the output can be toggled on and off using a trigger command In triggered mode the Model 8102 circuits are armed to generate one output waveform The trigger circuit is sensitive to transitions at the trigger input Select between positive or negative transitions to trigger the instrument You may also program the trigger level to the desired threshold level When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle and remains idle at the last point of the waveform The Model 8102 can be triggered from a number of sources 1 Rear panel connector designated as TRIG IN 2 Front panel button marked as MAN TRIG second function to the Enter button and 3 Bus commands t
53. from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Figure 2 9 Choose Your Search and installation Options Found New Hardware Wizard The software you are installing for this hardware USB Serial Port has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows lt P Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Figure 2 10 Windows Logo Warning Message 2 12 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for EI USB Serial Port e Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 11 New Hardware Found and Software installed The process above detected a USB device and installed the software for it then it has assigned a Serial Port address to the USB post In fact this ends the process unless you want to verify that the drivers and the port are correctly assigned on your PC To make sure your USB port and the Tabor 8102 configured correctly compare your Device Manager to the example in F
54. is available to generate the required trigger stimuli without the need to connect to external devices Figure 3 8 show the run mode options Press one of the soft keys in the left to select the required run mode Description of the various run modes and the parameters that are associated with each run mode is given in the following paragraphs PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 223 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRAR GENERATOR 1153102 ou cH2 output sync M JOA D Source 2276 Count BEE f j e REH Sale all OOO 2 4 Level 1 60Y CH2 20 _ Q Ee JOG State OFF State OFF Burst L 200ns o o0000000s ack ESC Triggered BASE MODE Sy INC OUT FUNC ARB POS O RUN BURST SRC CH1 Figure 8 Run Mode Options ei Note Burst run mode is shown in Figure 3 8 as an example however the following description applies to all Run Mode menus In general a specific run mode is selected from the Run Mode soft key menu The screen as shown in Figure 3 8 is displayed Proceed to select the run mode and to program parameters as follows 1 Press one of the soft keys to select from Continuous Triggered Gated or burst The output will immediately be updated with the selected run mode 2 Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll down to the parameter field you want to modify 3 17 8101 8102 User Manual Selecting the Modulation Run Modes Triggered Mode 3 18 3 P
55. is a very common waveform and is required in many applications however not being a true pulse generator the sinc pulse parameters are re computed every time a parameter is changed 1000 points are allocated for the sinc pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The sinc pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to sinc pulse waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the sinc waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amp
56. its transmit and receive lines crossed If your site is already wired connect the 8102 via twisted pair Ethernet cable Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10 100 BaseT network use phone cables will not work Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator After you connect the 8102 to the LAN port proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to set up LAN parameters The 8102 is supplied by the factory with the active remote interface set to USB If you intend to use USB connection then all you need to do is connect your USB cable and proceed with the USB Configuration instructions as given in this chapter to install the USB driver and to configure the USB port first connection only If you already used your instrument in various platforms and want to re select your interface To select an active Interface you need to access the Select Interface screen as shown in Figure 2 1 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The Select Interface soft key will update the display with the interface parameters Use the curser keys left and right to point to the required interface option then press Enter The new interface will Initialize and the icon at the top will be updated and will flag the active interface option The interface icon is always displayed at th
57. level which is being determined by the generator s peak to peak specification Time Interval Specifies the time that will lapse for the current index level You can program the time interval and the cumulative time will be adjusted accordingly Cumulative Time Specifies the time that will lapse from the start of the current pulse section You can program the cumulative time and the time interval will be adjusted accordingly Section Properties The Section Properties contains a summary of properties that are unique for the current section Design Units Provide information on the units that are used when you draw the pulse segments These units can be changed in the pulse editor options Section Start Provides timing information for the start of the current section If this is the first pulse section the value will always be 0 Subsequent sections will show the start mark equal to the end mark of the previous section Repeat Allows multiplication of pulse segments without the need to re design repetitive parts After you enter a repeat value press the Apply button to lock in the repeat multiplier 4 55 8101 8102 User Manual Pulse Example Section 1 4 56 File Edit Duration Displays the time that will lapse from the start of the pulse section to the end The duration shows the total time lapse including the repeated sections Control Buttons The control buttons allow appending inserti
58. low level programming of the 8102 using SCPI commands just as you will be using them in your program Installation of ArbConnection is simple and intuitive and only requires that visa32 dll runtime file be added to your Windows system folder Download the file from NI s National instrument web site www ni com Installation and operating instruction for ArbConnection are given in Chapter 4 The USB driver is required if you intend to connect the 8102 to a host computer on a USB bus Information how to connect the USB cable and how to load the software is given in this chapter In general the 8102 can be controlled from remote using one of the following interfaces USB Ethernet and GPIB Remote interface cables are not supplied with the instrument so if you plan on using one of the remote programming option make sure you have a suitable cable to connect to your host computer The following paragraphs describe how to connect and configure the 8102 to operate from remote The description is given for computers fitted with Windows XP but little changes will show while installing software on different Windows versions You can connect your Tabor 8102 to GPIB USB or LAN adapters depending on your application and requirements from your system Installing interface adapters in your computer will not be described in this manual since the installation procedures for these adapters change frequently You must follow the instructions supplied w
59. lower amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the high level setting and does not exceed 16 V and does not fall short of the 50 mV minimum high to low level setting Polarity The polarity parameter provides access to selecting the polarity of the pulse Three options are available Normal Inverted and Complemented These options are defined below Normal The pulse is generated with the parameters as programmed for the pulse Inverted The pulse is inverted about the OV base line setting Complemented The pulse is inverted about its mid amplitude base line setting Note that except for Normal output inverted and complemented replace high and low levels and rise and fall times Double State The Double State toggles between single and double pulse modes When double pulse state is turned on the screen is replaced by an icon that shows that the double pulse mode is on as shown in Figure 3 30 In this case the Double Delay button is made available enabling access to the double pulse delay parameter PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 23 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 1455102 Fon cuz OUTPUT SYNC GR wi M Ka 6 A Kaal p p BA Ga 0 Doubl 10 000 668ns j BOB Sr NORMAL 0 000 ESC ON MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG o ear eg ICH SYNC CH O f A f 7 A Son TTL son Figure 30 Double Pulse Mode BASE MODE SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUO
60. more parameters that were required for the command were omitted Remote Programming Reference Error Messages 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the instrument does not accept one in this position 131 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter The suffix may have been misspelled 148 Character data not allowed A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors Execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 221 Setting conflict Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an error Listed below are events causing setting conflicts 1 Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100 Corrective action Change parameters to correct the problem 2 ampl 2 Joffset is more than 16 Corrective action Reduce offset to 0 then change amplitude offset values to correct the problem 3 Activating filters when the 8102 is set to output the built in sine waveform or activating the built in sine waveform when one of the 8102 filters is turned on Corrective action If in sine select another function and activate the filter s 4 Activating burst mode when the 8102 is set to sequence mode or activating sequence mode when the 8102 is set to burst mode Corre
61. of the output will deteriorate completely Memory Management The memory management group provides access to the memory partition screen The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 6 Information how to use these screens is given in the following paragraphs If you want to learn more about waveform memory and segment control you should refer to section 3 of this manual In general the 8102 can generate arbitrary waveforms but before it can generate waveforms they must be downloaded to the instrument from a host computer Waveforms are downloaded to the instrument as coordinates and are stored in the 8102 in a place designated as waveform memory The waveform memory has a finite size of 512k Having such long memory does not necessarily mean that you have to use the entire memory every time you download a waveform On the contrary the 8102 allows segmentation of the memory so that up to 4096 smaller waveforms could be stored in this memory There are two ways to divide the waveform memory to segments 1 Define a segment and load it with waveform data define the next and load with data then the third etc or 2 Use what ArbConnection has to offer and that is to make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments download it to the instrument in one shot and then download a memory partition table that splits the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes Want to use it Here is how it is
62. press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The GPIB soft key will update the display with the GPIB address parameter The default address is 4 To modify the address press the Enter key and use the dial or keypad to select the new address Press Enter for the 8102 to accept the new address setting Select interface menu Interface is given hereinbefore Configuring your ei Note GPIB address setting does not automatically select the GPIB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Information how to select and 2 7 2 8 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF EN GP 1 00MH FUNCTION ARSITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Sg wA GPIB LAN 10 100 BASE MODE TEE FUNC MOD CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SE ean MODULATION ON CH OUTPUT SYNC e OMe e D NOTE IEEE 488 2 compatible CJ Co CJ EH EJE MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG 0 0 0 INT INUOUS Figure 2 2 GPIB Se Screen USB Configuration The USB requires no front panel configuration parameters Following simple installation steps as shown later just connect your Tabor 8102 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure The first time you connect the generator to your PC the new hardware will be detected and the message as shown in Figure 2 3 will appear Configuring t
63. required to enable in the register The Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other registers Query data waiting in the generator s output buffer is immediately reported through the Message Available bit bit 4 Bits in the summary register are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following Bit 0 Decimal value 1 Not used always set to 0 Bit 1 Decimal value 2 Not used always set to 0 5 67 8101 8102 User Manual Reading the Status Byte Register Clearing the Status Byte Register 5 68 Bit 2 Decimal value 4 Not used always set to 0 Bit 3 Decimal value 8 Not used always set to 0 Bit 4 Decimal value 16 Message Available Queue Summary Message MAV The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller The controller can for example send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV all system bus activity is held up until the device responds Bit 5 Decimal value 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message This bit indicates whethe
64. run output of a waveform Output can be enabled and disabled from a remote interface only Upon trigger outputs one waveform cycle Last cycle always completed Upon trigger outputs a single or multiple pre programmed number of waveform cycles Does not apply to Sequence Mode Burst is programmable from 1 through 1M cycles Transition enables or disables generator output Last cycle always completed Same as triggered except first output cycle is initiated by a software trigger Consequent output requires external triggers through the rear panel TRIG IN connector Rear panel BNC or front panel manual trigger button Trigger commands from a remote controller only 10kQ 5 V 1mV 200 mV 12 V DC to 2 5 MHz Positive Negative transitions selectable 210 ns 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns 0 200 ns to 20 s system delay 20 ns Error Re trigger Delay Waveform end to waveform restart Resolution Error Trigger Jitter Standard Waveforms Frequency Range Sine Square All other waveforms Frequency Resolution Accuracy amp Stability Sine Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Triangle Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Square Duty Cycle Range Pulse Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Ramp Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Gaussian Pulse Time Constant Range Sinc Pulse Zero Crossings Range Exponential Pulse Time Constant Range DC Output Function Range Sine Wave Performance Descript
65. termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 37 3333333MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP77 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 56MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 56MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP78 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 47 56 0000001MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 56 0000001 MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP79 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 48 80MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 outpu
66. that control the basic operation of the generator From this group you can set the output function run mode turn the outputs on and off and adjust the parameters for the various functions There are four panels in this group Main Standard Arbitrary and Trigger The Main panel is always visible because this is the panel that controls operating functions run modes and sets the outputs on and off The other panels can be made visible by clicking on the appropriate tab in the Operation group The operation set of panels are described below The Main Panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is the first panel you see after invoking ArbComnection Notice how buttons and LED s are grouped this is done specifically so that common parameters are placed in functional groups The Main Panel groups allow from left to right adjustment of amplitude and offset selection of waveform mode selection of run mode and control over SYNC and Main output parameters Controls where applicable are provided for each channel separately l f Function F Figure 4 3 the Main Panel If you are connected properly to a PC and ArbConnection has detected your instrument then every time you press a button you are getting an immediate action on the 8102 It is different if you are changing parameters on the display Doing this you ll have to press the Execute button for the command to update the instrument The functional groups in the Main Panel are explained below
67. the AC signal is symmetrical around the OV line Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue Amplifier Offset Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CAL SERV 1 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP1 for DMM reading of OV 20mV Pre Amplifier Offset Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CAL SERV 2 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP2 for DMM reading of OV 5mV Base Line Offset Low Range Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 509 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as
68. the Utility menu Adjust the brightness and the dial direction for your preferences and select the clock source as required by your system management Information on the how to adjust the horizontal units and how to adjust the display for your load impedance is given in the following paragraphs Normally frequency units Hertz are used when specifying waveform frequency however at times and as part of global system considerations it makes it more convenient to work with time units seconds The horizontal scale of the 8102 can be modified to operate either in the frequency domain or time domain The default setting for the generator is frequency units Adjusting Load Impedance a BBABA Monitoring the Internal Temperature BASE MODE SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUOUS FUNC PULSE POS 6 CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF Using the Instrument Monitoring the Internal Temperature As specified in Appendix A the display of the output amplitude is valid when the load impedance is exactly 50Q Such impedance is absolutely necessary when operating at high frequencies where unmatched output impedance can cause reflections and standing waves It is therefore recommended to terminate the output with 50Q loads only In certain applications where the load impedance is of no consequence it may range from 500 to open circuit however since the source impedance is 50Q the displayed amplitude will be different than the act
69. the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 1 Toggles the keep alive mode on and off When on the 8102 constantly checks for smooth LAN connection at intervals programmed by the syst keep time command The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 8102 reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 8102 will return 0 or 1 depending on the present keep alive setting 5 64 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands SYSTem KEEPalive TIMEout lt time_out gt Description This command programs the keep alive time out The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time_out gt 2to300 Numeric 45 Programs the keep alive time out in units of seconds The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 8102 reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 8102 will return the present keep alive time out value SYSTem KEEPalive PROBes lt probs gt Description This command programs
70. the following controls Push ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels buttons LED s radio buttons Dial and Digital display The function of each control is described below Push Buttons These are used for toggling a function on and off For example the Output Enable button in the Output group toggles the output on and off The first mouse click will push the button inwards and will turn on a red bar at the center of the button indicating that the function is on The second mouse click will turn the function off Radio Buttons Are used for changing operating modes or selecting between mode options One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center indicating its state condition LED s The LED s indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the Digital Display Red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is selected Only one LED can be ON at a time Y HINT LED s are turned on by clicking on the LED or the text next to it The selected parameter is flagged by a darker LED shade Dial Use the dial to modify displayed reading To use the dial press and hold the mouse cursor on the dial and move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the number or counterclockwise circle to decrease the displayed number The dial modifies digits at the cursor position and will allow modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter lf you reach the end of the range the dial
71. the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time_out gt 2 to 10 Numeric 2 Programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period and the LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by this parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 8102 reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 8102 will return the present keep alive number of probes SYSTem TEMPerature Description Query only This query will interrogate the 8102 for its internal temperature reading Response The 8102 will return the current internal temperature value in units of degrees C similar to the following 40 00 5 65 8101 8102 User Manual IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 5 66 Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar commands that perform similar functions the IEEE STD 488 2 document has specified a common set of commands and queries that all compatible devices must use This avoids situations where devices from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable functions and report status The IEEE STD 488 2 treats common commands and qu
72. the pulse to transition from its high to low level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt Oto 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Will set the fall time parameter Note that the sum of all parameters including the fall time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value in units of seconds 5 60 System Command Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands 9 s The system related commands are not related directly to waveform generation but are an important part of operating the 8102 These commands can reset or test the instrument or query the instrument for system information Table 5 8 System Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default RESet RST SYSTem ERRor LOCal VERSion INFOrmation CALibration MODel SERial IP ADDRess lt IP_address gt MASK lt mask gt GATeway lt gate_way gt BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 0 HOSTname lt host_name gt KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 TIMEout 2 to 300 45 PROBes 2 to 10 2 TEMPerature RESet or RST Description This command will reset the 8102 to its factory defaults SYSTem ERRor Description Query only This query will interro
73. the same start phase Further control of leading edge offset between channels is also provided The same input is also used in FSK mode where the output shifts between two frequencies carrier and shifted frequencies The output generates carrier frequency when the input signal is false below trigger level and shifted frequency when the input is true above trigger level FUSE T1 25A 250V TABOR ELECTRONICS wew taborelec com MADE IN ISRAEL Figure 1 6 8102 Rear Panel REF IN LAN USB GPIB AC LINE AC FUSE Getting Started 1 Functional Description This SMB connector accepts 10MHz TTL level reference signal The external reference input is available for those applications requiring better accuracy and stability than what is provided by the 8102 The reference input is active only after selecting the external reference source mode This RG45 connector accepts standard Ethernet cable Correct setting of the IP address is required to avoid conflicts with other instruments or equipment on the network Information how to change IP address and load instrument drivers to the computer is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This connector accepts standard USB 1 cable The connection to the host computer is automatic and does not require any address setting from within the 8102 The first time the 8102 is connected to the computer it will request the driver file This file is located on the CD
74. to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation Ch2 Amplitude 510mV Adjustment Note DMM reading Base Line Offset High Range Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation Ch2 Amplitude 1 590V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 12 for DMM reading the same as in Setup 3 5 Repeat Setup 3 and Setup 4 until the DMM readings are the same 10mV 6 Adjust RV2 for DMM readings of 0V 10mV Base Line Offset Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV Adjustments and Firmware Update d Reference Oscillators Adjustments 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation Ch2
75. to remove in band amplifier harmonics and spurious Parameters Name Type Default Description None Discrete None Disables all filters at the output path This option cannot be selected when standard waveform is generated 25M Discrete Connects a 25MHz Bessel type filter to the output path 50M Discrete Connects a 50MHz Bessel type filter to the output path 5 16 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands 65M Discrete Connects a 25MHz Elliptic type filter to the output path 120M Discrete Connects a 120MHz Elliptic type filter to the output path Response The 8102 will return NONE 25M 50M 60M or 120M depending on the type of filter presently connected to the output ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal Description This command will select the reference source for the sample clock generator Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects an internal source The internal source could be either the standard 100ppm oscillator or the optional 1ppm TCXO EXTernal Discrete Activates the external reference input An external reference must be connected to the 8102 for it to continue normal operation Response The 8102 will return INT or EXT depending on the present 8102 setting FREQuency lt freq gt MINimum MAXimum Description This command modifies the frequency of the standard waveforms in units of hertz Hz It has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Paramete
76. to select FSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the FSK data array are clocked causing the output frequency to hop from carrier to shifted frequency values and visa versa Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to Numeric 1063 Programs the rate of which the frequency shifts from 10e6 carrier to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 8102 will return the present baud value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned 5 45 8101 8102 User Manual FSK FREQuency MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 8102 will generate a pulse designated as FSK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position 4000 integer only Response The 8102 will return the present marker position FSK DATA lt fsk_data gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 8102 to hop from carrier to shifted frequency and visa versa Data format is a string of 0 and 1 which define when the output generates carrier frequency and when it shifts frequency to the FSK value 0 defines carrier frequ
77. up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The triangular waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the shape becomes distorted to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to triangle waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the triangle waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset se
78. waveform and therefore the state of the filters can not be changed until another output function is selected A setting conflict error will occur if one attempts to change the filter state before changing to another output function If you do not plan on using the filters make sure that you leave the selection OFF This will eliminate confusing setting conflicts Modification of the filter state and range is done from the Outputs menu To access this menu select the Outputs screen as shown in Figure 3 3 and modify the parameters as shown in Figure 3 12 The majority of applications require the use of common waveforms such as sinusoidal triangular and square In fact these are the only waveforms that function generators can produce and therefore one should expect that these waveforms be available even in a complex generator such as this The 8102 being a completely digital instrument has a library of built in waveforms that allow generation of these basic waveforms plus many more By default the 8102 is programmed to generate one of the common waveforms in the market sine waveform Figure 3 13 shows a list of all other waveforms that the instrument can generate however one must not forget that the waveforms are generated digitally from either lookup tables or formulated from standard equations and therefore each time a new waveform is selected one should expect to have a slight delay between the time the waveform was selected to
79. 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2e6 1 with option 2 0 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER MODulation PULSe FIX 5 14 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands OUTPut LOAD lt load gt Description This command will specify the load impedance that will be applied to the 8102 output Parameters Name Type Default Description lt load gt Numeric 50 Will specify the load impedance that will be applied to integer only the 8102 outputs in units of Q The default setting is 50 Q The range of load impedance is 50 Q to 1 MQ Accurate setting of the load impedance is crucial for correct display readout of the amplitude level on the load OUTPut OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will turn the 8102 output on and off Note that for safety the outputs always default to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the output is on or O if the output is off OUTPut SYNC OFF ON 0 1 2 Description This command will turn the 8102 SYNC output on and off Note that for safety the SYNC output always defaults to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Will set the SYNC output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the SYNC output is on or 0 if the SYNC output is off OU
80. 023 Min 32768 fi C Auto Defaut m Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands E 24000 sinlomg p 4500 sin 2 omg p e OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 24 Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion In Figure 4 25 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e p 250 Increasing the value of the divisor 200 in this case will slow down the rate of decay Use the following equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p 10 e1 p 250 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 25 4 41 8101 8102 User Manual xi File Edit View wnloa About 7 SE r Anchor m Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Ay NG A pa uy a El Gd 1 x Es Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles Manual Scale Ae F on CH2 End pts 1023 Min 32768 d C Auto Defaut L Anchor 0 Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands ESA fi 2000 sinfomg p 10 e p 250 v OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as shown in Figure 4 26 is the most complex to be discussed here Here 100 cycles of sinewave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation d
81. 1 TRIGger IMMediate BURG STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 GATE STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 LEVel 5to 5 1 6 SOURce ADVance BUS EXTernal MIXed EXT SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 8101 8102 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Auxiliary Functions Commands AUXiliary PULSe DELay 0 to 10 0 DOUBle STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 DELay 0 to 1e3 1e 3 LEVel HIGH 7 992 to 8 5 LOW 8 to 7 992 0 HIGH 0 to 1e3 le 3 POLarity NORMal COMPlement INVerted NORM PERiod 80e 9 to 1e6 80e 9 to 2e6 with option 2 10e 3 STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 1e3 1e 3 TRAiling 0 to 1e3 1e 3 System Commands RESet SYSTem ERRor LOCal VERSion INFOrmation CALibration MODel SERial IP ADDRess lt IP_address gt MASK lt mask gt GATeway lt gate_way gt BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 0 HOSTname lt host_name gt KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 TIMEout 2 to 300 45 PROBes 2 to 10 2 TEMPerature 5 12 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyw
82. 10 Noise wav 1000 The above equation will generate amplitude modulated waveform with added noise The following steps demonstrate how to create store and combine waveforms using this equation Step 1 Create and store sine wav Invoke the Wave command and generate a sine waveform Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As from the File command Save this file using the name Sine wav Note where you store this waveform as you would have to know the path for the next step Step 2 Create and store Noise wav From the Wave command select Noise Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw noisy signal From the File menu select Save Waveform As and save this waveform using the name Noise wav 4 43 8101 8102 User Manual Step 3 Write and compute the original equation Amplitude p c Sine wav sin omg p 5 c Noise wav 10 If you did not make any mistakes your waveform screen should look as shown in Figure 4 27 j ad About p nchor m Waveform Amplitude m Level nas lt x 2 Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles Ic Manual gt End pts 1023 Min Loes 9 D Le Auto ES Equation Ampltudelp ms Store 7 Browse Operands d Kia Vertical Scale 64kPts BkPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 27 Combining Waveforms into Equations 4 44 ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer is a great tool fo
83. 102 User Manual Off 3 38 GE 1 00MH FUNCTION ARSITRARY GENERATOR WS8102 Modulation Type Modulation Shape Sweep BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINI FUNC MOD POS a CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CHI MODULATION ON Figure 16 Selecting a modulated Waveform The Modulation Off is a special case of the modulation function where the output is not modulated but generates carrier waveform CW frequency only CW is the sine waveform that is being modulated When placed in Modulation Off the sine waveform is generated from the main outputs continuously The advantage of this mode is that sine waveforms can be generated from 100 uHz to 100 MHz Modulation off operates in continuous mode only The CW parameter does not change when you switch from one modulation function to another Figure 3 17 shows the Modulation Off menus While in the Off option there are some parameters that can be programmed for the carrier waveform CW Frequency defines the frequency of the carrier waveform Using this standard AM function the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine The CW parameter as programmed in this menu is shared by all other modulation options Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another The Amplitude parameter as programmed in this menu is shared by all other waveform options Offset defines the of
84. 13 PP EE 1 13 AG PUSS Ese anaconda 1 13 8101 8102 User Manual Run Modes deene eege EAR EE deet 1 14 O EE 1 14 Triggered sorsien a eee aenehigh ae Matron ete heateen 1 14 PU eS eebe 1 15 A DEE 1 15 Delayed TQ EE 1 15 Phe Me E 1 15 A A aaraa a et dat plane doko dat gaiadaloncne axed aa d ea dhodan ded 1 16 External si dla 1 17 dee e ee lee 1 17 Mixed EE 1 17 OPUS A A teh crane 1 a 1 18 Standard Waveforms een 1 18 Arbitrary WavefotmS nicotina 1 19 Modulated Waveforms ii a rr iS 1 21 MODULO Off enseres 1 22 AM rd od o 1 22 Pili aa de e e E e aiaentes 1 22 FSK enyar a R E ER ei eGhw ue tau E E meals tea eeaeves aoa 1 22 ee EE EE BERET PERC PERE NE PA cere To OME ESE AP 1 23 SWEEP EE 1 23 Modulation ie Me Le TEE 1 23 Auxiliary Functions Esconde aid Gea aaa eee 1 23 Digital Pulse Generato EE 1 23 O tp t State td AS 1 25 Customizing the Output UniS ves cri 1 25 Programming the Model DA os le a Ns AN as A eee 1 25 2 Configuring the Instrument c omocciosconossininconicnsnino ctenetensseeeencedeecsecnsecteevaseeceteessesceceese 2 1 feele 2 3 Unpacking and Initial INSPSCtor EE 2 3 Salely Pre CUNAS dai BA Aenea aa nial nied ria 2 3 Performance Checking 2 4 Power REQUIEM EE 2 4 Eise e Be WEE 2 4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment ooo ec cceceseseeseceseseeseceeeseerseeneeeeees 2 5 Preparation for Use cta ia 2 5 WAS TAUNTON EE 2 5 Installing Software Utilities iii a AS 2 6 Controlling the Instrument from Remote AAA 2 6
85. 19 FM Burst Standard Wave MMS unida 6 20 Gated FM Standard Waveforms AAA 6 21 Re triggered FM Bursts Standard Waveforms ssseessessrnsserrssrnesrnrerrnsrrrssrnnsrnnrrnnnet 6 22 LBE 6 23 A A O OOO o eeee EEA 6 24 AE a E E E E Seege eege duech 6 25 SE eege eege E 6 26 EE EE lo rd 6 27 SYNC Qualler Blusa aia det 6 27 o A O 6 27 Waveform Memory Operation 6 29 CEET 6 29 Remote e RN 6 29 E Gelee EE 6 30 RL E ge 6 30 CAN Contorno dt trio ie 6 31 Adjustments and Firmware Update ocomnnnnnnccccononennnnnnonanccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncncr cnn cnn cren 7 1 A ans oor Se ageicnn dene naceea teatnaas naatete cad nok waege anise eee orcas thee eckt hedccataaeeeeanees 7 3 enee 7 3 Environmental COMGMIONS citada id 7 3 WV ARUP ONIOG ri ira eg ies 7 3 Recommended Test Equipment iicetaccceseaiseo tetas geegetek erdege heSCdESE EELER rta eons ibas 7 4 Adjustment Procedures eto tac iaa 7 4 vii 8101 8102 User Manual Reference Oscillators Adjustments sei wieccaieis idesenten dachcgysetacevereadstaveiseeentededssnd paid 7 6 Base Line Offset EE 7 8 Offset AdjUStIME Sii 7 11 Amplitude Adjustments a 7 15 Pulse See E un LE 7 24 ee EE taa Ati 7 24 Base Line Offset AGjUSIMOMNtS cion as 7 29 Offset Adjustments EE 7 32 Amplitude Adjustments rta ose 7 36 Pulse Response Adjustments ci iaa iio 7 44 Flatness Adus IMSS ci 7 45 Updating 8102 tens EE 7 49 Appendices A Specifications saini inaniram anaana Kananan aa Rae a ena Aan Aaa
86. 1kHz Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 9 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP39 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 22 500mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 7 37 8101 8102 User Manual 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 10 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP40 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV Setup 23 100mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 11 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP41for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Setup 24 50mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM inpu
87. 2 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Ch Amplitude 100mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP25 for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV 7 18 Setup 28 Setup 29 Setup 30 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 50mV Amplitude Output Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Ch Amplitude 50mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP26 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV 10V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 10V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP27 for DMM reading of 3 535V 30mV 3V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function
88. 202 45 214 Invalid Second number does not match the previous IP addresses The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 123 234 45 0 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0 123 234 45 255 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255 2 16 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface y TIP To find out the network settings for your computer perform the following steps e For Windows 98 Me 2000 XP 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type IPCONFIG 3 Press lt Enter gt If you need more information you can run ipconfig with the all option by typing IPCONFIG all at the DOS prompt This shows you all of the settings for the computer Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device e For Windows 95 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type WINIPCFG 3 Press lt Enter gt Select the Ethernet adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the drop down list 2 8101 8102 User Manual 2 18 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 3 Using the Instrument Title Page EE ee ee EE 3 3 Inter Chantiel Depende e ees ett ibid 3 3 Inter Channel Phase Dependency mccccoccccicccoconinnncncncnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 3 3 O tp t Terminal WE 3 3 Input Output Protection cy keene eea alos 3 4 Power On Res t REI 3 4 Controlling th 8102 cuid
89. 4 5 G00Upp Outputs t 3 a 90 99 d gt 9 9 oe MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC STD Pos a LEVEL 1 60U eme o K Sr RUN TRIG SLOPE POSITIVE En SS Lu h Lu h Go b Pa J A 50N TTL 50n Figure 1 Reset 8102 to Factory Defaults Table 1 Default Conditions After Reset Function Parameter Default Inter Channel Dependency Outputs State Off Separate SYNC State Common Operating Mode Common Active Channel Separate Output Function Separate Output Function Shape Separate Standard Wave Frequency Common User Wave Sample Clock Common Sample Clock Source amp Reference Common Amplitude Separate Offset Separate Filter State Separate Filter Type Separate Trigger Slope Common Trigger Level Common Trigger Source Common Trigger Delay Common Re Trigger Common Modulation State Off Common 3 5 8101 8102 User Manual Controlling the Controlling 8102 function modes and parameters is simply a matter of pressing once or twice the appropriate button as described in the 8102 following paragraphs Refer to Figure 3 2 throughout this description 1 Power Switch Toggles 8102 power ON and OFF 2 Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing 3 Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be au
90. 48 80MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 80MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP88 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 49 100MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 100MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP89 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 7 48 Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware Setup 50 Carrier Flatness Modulation Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Modulation ON Modulation Sweep Start Freq 1MHz Stop Freq 100MHz Sweep Time 1ms Marker 1MHz Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Se
91. 6 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands MODulation TYPE OFF FM AM SWEeep FSK PSK Description This command will select the modulation type All modulation types are internal thus external signals are not required for producing modulation Parameters Name OFF FM AM SWEep FSK PSK Response Type Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Default OFF Description Modulation off is a special mode where the output generates continuous non modulated sinusoidal carrier waveform CW This turns on the FM function Program the FM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the AM function Program the AM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the sweep function Program the sweep parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the FSK function Program the FSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the PSK function Program the PSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application The 8102 will return OFF FM AM SWE FSK PSK depending on the present modulation type setting 5 37 8101 8102 User Manual MODulation CARRier lt frequency gt Description This command programs the CW frequency Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sin
92. 8102 LCD display is an icon only The actual output waveform may look entirely different Using the Instrument Changing the Output Frequency Changing the You should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency The waveform frequency parameter is Output Frequency valid for standard waveforms only and controls waveform frequency at the output connector The sample clock frequency parameter is valid for arbitrary waveforms only and defines the frequency of which the generator clocks data points Standard waveform frequency is measured in units of Hz Arbitrary waveform sample clock frequency is measured in units of S s samples per second The frequency of a given arbitrary waveform at the output connector is dependant on sample clock frequency the number of data points and other specific waveform definitions The frequency of the output waveform will change only if a standard waveform is generated First select a standard waveform as described earlier and then proceed with frequency modification Observe Figure 3 5 and modify frequency using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 5 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the frequency parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to program the new frequency value 3 Press M k x1 or m to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the frequency value with the dial and
93. A Li ke Teor E Taria E Properties Firmware Up V Use wait message Refresh il Close Figure 7 6 WW8102 has been Detected on the LAN Network B NOTES Click Refresh again if you do not see your device in the list of Ethernet devices If you cannot detect your device after a few attempts check that you have not lost the connection as described in previous paragraphs You can only update instrument s that appear in the NETConfig window 7 52 Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware Point and click on the device you want to update The selected device will now have blue background Click on the Firmware Up button The firmware Update dialog box as shown in Figure 7 7 appears WW2572A Boot TE NETConfig Firmware Heger Fi are Uppate 00 13 76 43 00 07 Flash binary image filename File transfer progress Current status Figure 7 7 The Firmware Update Dialog Box In the TE NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box click on the J button to browse and locate the upgrade file After you select the file its complete path will be displayed in the Flash binary image filename field as shown in Figure 7 8 Make sure the file in the path agrees with that specified by your supervisor To complete the update process click on Update and observe the File Transfer Progress bar The update will complete with a Firmware Update d Successfully message as show
94. ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through 7 19 8101 8102 User Manual termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 3V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP28 for DMM reading of 1 0606 7mV Setup 31 1V Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 5 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP29 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 32 500mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 6 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP30 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV 7 20 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscill
95. AN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUOUS e o a FUNC PULSE Pos a CLOCK REF EXT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF e Y Em b A A Son TL 50n Figure 34 Reading the 8102 Internal Temperature 3 58 Chapter 4 ArbConnection Title Page Wiats DEE anat ctas 4 3 Introduction to AroConnection aa alado Eos 4 3 IAStallingiArHGOnNGCHON tac id 4 3 Quitting ADC o Dale eel ie 4 4 For the New and Advanced Users cooooccccccccocicocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manuals ie 4 4 The Opening A dis 4 5 ArbConnection Features cooconococccccnccnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnreninnnnns 4 6 Th eege ME 4 6 The Operation Panels aia 4 8 MEI SE ee Ee Ge e a foe ehaa oe 4 8 A E BE 4 10 Pat STU ALY 2c eo aa aout 22 ed re eae ead eae ead neue int tad ee ee 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table ERKENNEN EEN 4 13 EIERE EE Eege 4 15 The Modulation Panel cuicos 4 16 PM a road 4 17 ENEE 4 18 II a i ear ta e Nace oa eae Bile a 4 19 PSH PSK ssa siecinhcheeacehavaralebcnedecatantuapeielie E bans ted Galawiaadeaeeteadake 4 20 The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panel 4 22 TING System Panels EE 4 23 Ee EM EE 4 23 E aigle da a a do a e E 4 24 The Composers Panels EE 4 25 The Wave COMPOST ra da 4 25 The Toolbar 4 32 The Waveform Re EE 4 33 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor ooooocccccnccccnnocaccccnanancnnnnnanaccnnnannnnccnnnns 4 34 8101 8102 User Manual
96. Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 10V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP37 for DMM reading of 3 535V 30mV 7 36 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 20 3V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 3 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 3V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP38 for DMM reading of 1 0606V 7mV Setup 21 1V Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency
97. An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 Finally when you are done creating and editing your waveform you can save your work to a directory of your choice The name at the title will show you the name you selected for storing your waveform and its path One of the most powerful feature within ArbConnection and probably the feature that will be used most is the Equation Editor The Equation Editor let you write equations the same way as you would do on a blank piece of paper The equations are then translated to sequential points that form waveforms and are displayed on the waveform screen The Equation Editor will detect and inform you on syntax errors and with its self adjusting feature will automatically adjust your parameters so that none of the points on your waveform will exceed the maximum scale limits When you invoke the Equation Editor the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 21 will display Use the following paragraphs to learn how to use this dialog box and how to write your equations x gt Anchor r Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts fo Max fe191 Cycles Manual Scale i End pts 1023 Min Lea if E Auto _Defaut Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands UnA amp sin 10 omg p p f 0 1 y OK Figure 4 21 the Equation Editor Dialog Box ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor
98. C OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS 6 CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Figure 25 PSK Menus 3 45 8101 8102 User Manual Sweep 3 46 Start Frequency BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS a CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Sweep modulation allows carrier waveform CW to sweep from one frequency defined by the sweep start parameter to another frequency defined by the sweep stop parameter Note that CW is sinewave only The start and stop frequencies can be programmed with 11 digits throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument from 10 mHz to 100 MHz When you select sweep modulation the menus as shown in Figure 3 26 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification gt CH1 Modulation 7 A il A Type A Sweep Logarithmic Type E Figure 26 Sweep Menus Sweep Type defines the steps of which the frequency increments or decrements from start to stop frequencies A choice is provided between linear and logarithmic steps If you select linear sweep the carrier waveform frequency steps through the frequencies within a time interval which is set by the sweep time parameter Likewise using the logarithmic sweep type the frequency span between the start and stop frequencies is stepped through using logarithmic steps Sweep Direction defines the sweep direction UP sets sweep direction from start frequency to stop frequenc
99. Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 7 39 8101 8102 User Manual 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 100mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP45 for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Setup 28 50mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP46 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV Setup 29 10V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 10V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP47 for DMM reading of 3 535V 30mV 7 40 Adjustments and Firmware Updat
100. DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP33 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV 500mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 500mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP34 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV 100mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 100mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP35 for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 38 50mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed
101. E Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries or pending Bit 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs For example the following command will cause a DDE error VOLTage 5 VOLTage OFFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits however the generator is unable to generate such an amplitude and offset combination Bit 4 Execution Error This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator Bit 5 Command Error This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement Bit 6 User Request This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device Bit 7 Power On This bit indicates that the device s power source was cycled since the last time the register was read The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of th
102. E 1 13 E 1 13 E cido 1 13 AG LINE ass 1 13 en EE 1 13 in Bee st io cede ias tenis 1 14 CONIL i di 1 14 o ES 1 14 A E dat Sev sluua tabu te beds anepaneceeysctawtredvanensgnayedes a nace sacee decararegenlenutarid 1 15 E WEE 1 15 Delayed Trigger it di 1 15 A O 1 15 A Sete salen ia aan cua a hie sae iene 1 16 8101 8102 User Manual AA A OS 1 17 A ita E cdi anteabaied hardtuelctna ETT 1 17 TE WE uct ctcaaah se Mea caneceuaaach E thachauctaaahoes 1 17 OUTPUT DG rs dad 1 18 Standard Weoo MS oi da 1 18 Arbitrary Wavetorins icesscccotieaehicold adhceeitecs Hthaveeietetanued wane tien gu se ede 1 19 Modulated Wave lo E 1 21 Module Soi 1 22 AM A e eege Eet 1 22 A A eRe TET ne Se Li Oech RPT tr Per Ree ea TR Ota een rear errr ee 1 22 ES RA 1 22 POR scan etal ncaa eden E a 1 23 NY SIS ee eege 1 23 Modulation RUM Ree EE 1 23 Auxiliary lee 1 23 Digital Pulse Generator EE EE 1 23 Output State rasca artista 1 25 Customizing the Output Units ups ne 1 25 Programming the Model 102 oi 1 25 1 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction 8102 Feature Highlights Getting Started 1 What s in This Chapter This chapter contains a general description of the Model 8102 Waveform Generator and an overall functional description of the instrument It also describes the front and rear panel connectors and indicators lay NOTE This manual is common to both Model 8101 and Model 8102 If you purchased the Model 8101 please ignore all ref
103. Eege eEEA AE 5 7 Instrument Control Commande AAA EEN 5 14 Standard Waveforms Control Command tus 5 21 Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commande A 5 28 8101 8102 User Manual Modulated Waveforms Control Commande AAA 5 35 FM Modulation Programming sisi ca Rc ue e 5 38 AM modulation Programming oocococconccccccnnonanonnccnnncnonannnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnn nn nn ccnnn nr rn nnnnr nn nccnnnnn 5 41 Sweep Modulation Programming cccccccnnnoncncccnnnnnonannnnnnnncnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnncnnnn nn rnnnnnn rra nccnnnnn 5 42 FSK Modulation Programming 1 224 000 a ee ee 5 45 PSK Modulation Programming scort ae aes 5 46 Run Mode COmmands EE 5 50 Auxillary COMMAS EE 5 55 Digital Pulse Programming 5 56 A Eeer e 5 61 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries oooocccccnooccccnononcncnanoncnnnnnannnonnnoncnnnnnns 5 66 The SCPI Status Registers unan ori 5 67 The Status Byte Register TB 5 67 Reading the Status Byte Register amara dit id 5 68 Clearing the Status Byte Register EEN 5 68 Service Request Enable Register SRE acacia cin nonnononornonnnnnnennnnnno 5 70 Standard Event Status Register ESp 5 70 Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE ooooooccccccccnncccconccancncccnnnncnnananancnnnnnnnn 5 71 E eaeaattee 5 72 6 Performance CneCKS 2 0 32 Ee tet 6 1 Whats In This CNaplel raras iia tl 6 3 te ee tU oooO Waites a ta ri 6 3 Environmental CONOS Lan Ai 6 3 Warm Up A A aA ued dass wats tee agtea dant A eaa aaa aa de ceaniies 6 4 i itial Instrument SS S
104. FF using the trig del command The trigger delay time command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 200e 9 to20 Numeric 200e 9 Programs the trigger delay time Response The 8102 will return the present trigger delay time value TRIGger GATE OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the gate run mode on and off This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT CONT OFF Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the gate run mode off ON Discrete Enables the gated run mode Response The 8102 will return OFF or ON depending on the selected option 5 52 Remote Programming Reference Run Mode Commands TRIGger LEVel lt level gt Description The trigger level command sets the threshold level at the trigger input connector The trigger level command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt level gt 5to 5 Numeric 1 6 Programs the trigger level The value affects the rear panel input only Response The 8102 will return the present burst count value TRIGger SOURce ADVance EXTernal BUS MIXed Desc
105. For ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has OV to 3 3V amplitude 50 duty cycle 1ms period and 100ns transition times you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 0 Time interval 0 Cumulative Time 0 Index 2 Level 3 3 Time Interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 1 Index 3 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 4 Level 0 Time interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 6 Index 5 Level 0 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters and the specified point is marked with a red dot Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Section Structure The term Section Structure is used to define part of the pulse train that share common properties There are four parameters that can be programmed in this group Index Level Time Interval and Cumulative Time Index ls added automatically as you program pulse segments The index line is highlighted as you point and click on pulse segments on the pulse editor screen Level Specifies that peak level of the programmed segment As you build the pulse the level window is expended automatically to fit the required amplitude range Note however there is a limit to the
106. ITRARY GENERATOR 155102 CHI oe output sync MDA LJUJE EAEE ED ODE Pl Auxiliary he S we es Lee gt Functions MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG l BASE MODE SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUOUS FUNC STD POS o CLOCK REF EXT O E oe z Ke E RUN CONT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF am z ee A A O MH A A 50N TL 50n Figure 27 Accessing the Pulse Generator Menus ei Note The pulse shape on the 8102 LCD display is an icon only The actual output waveform may look entirely different PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 123 1 00MH FUNCTION ARSITRAR GENERATOR 1453102 Fon cH2 oureur snc M wn DO Apply k Z x1 CIVICS A po ook MENU LOCAL MANTRIG r AA ona on E 60 0 Figure 28 the Digital Pulse Generator Menus The digital pulse generator menus provide access to all pulse parameters just as they would be programmed on an analog pulse generator To access the pulse parameters use one of the soft keys If you do not see a required parameter on the screen press the key up or down to scroll through the menus 3 48 f Using the Instrument Using the Auxiliary Functions The technique of changing parameter values is exactly the same as you are using to modify standard waveform parameters Simply press the soft key that is associated with the parameter then punch in the numbers using the numeric keyboard and complete the modification by assigning a suffix and pressing the Ent
107. Impedance 500 1 Short Circuit to Case Ground 10s max Output On or Off Output Disconnected Front panel BNC TTL Pulse with Arbitrary and Standard Waves LCOM in Burst Modes including Burst Modulation Marker with Modulation Mode only programmable position Point 0 to maximum segment size programmable with 4 point resolution Rear panel 25 pin D connector IEEE 488 2 1993 0 1 31 configured via front panel programming Downloads arbitrary waveform data DMA support is required by the controller Rear panel RJ 45 female Twisted pair 10 100Base T Programmed from the front panel or through the USB port 10 100 Mbit sec with auto negotiation SCPI commands over TCP IP Type A receptacle Version 1 1 SCPI commands over USB Front Panel Display Front Panel Indicator LED s Output On SYNC On Power Requirements Mains Input Range Maximum Total Module Power Mechanical Dimensions Weight Environmental Operating temperature Humidity non condensing EMC Certification Safety Appendices A Specifications Color LCD 3 8 reflective 320 x 240 pixels back lit Green Output on off Separate for each channel Green SYNC on off 85 to 265Vac 47 63 Hz 60W 212 x 88 x 415 mm W x H x D Approximately 3 5 Kg 0 C 50 C 11 C 30 C 85 31 C 40 C 75 CE marked EN61010 1 2 revision 8101 8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank
108. In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2 Offset 5V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 67for DMM reading of 5V 25mV Setup 12 7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2 Offset 7V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 66 for DMM reading of 7V 35mV 7 33 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 13 Setup 14 Setup 15 7 34 1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 2V Ch2 Offset 1V Ch2 Output On A
109. MM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 10 for DMM reading of OV 5mV The offset adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue 1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 2V Ch2 Offset 1V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 69 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV 3V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 2V Ch2 Offset 3V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 68 for DMM reading of 3V 15mV Setup 11 5V Offset Output Amplifier
110. Modulation Shape Programs the modulating waveform shape C AM Modulation Depth Parameter modulation depth D AM Modulation Freq Parameter envelop frequency JD AM CW Frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency JD AM Trigger Baseline Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode JD AM Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude JD FM Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset B FM Modulation Shape Programs the modulating waveform shape C FM CW Frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency D FM Frequency Programs FM deviation frequency Deviation JD FM Modulation Freq Parameter modulation frequency JD FM Marker Programs the marker frequency JD FM Trigger Baseline Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode JD FM Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude JD Sweep Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset B Sweep Sweep Type Selects from linear or logarithmic C Sweep Direction Selects from up or down D Sweep Start Frequency Programs the start frequency 3 8 Using the Instrument 8102 Front Panel Menus 3 Table 2 Front Panel Waveform Menus continued Soft Modulation 23017 Level 3 Level Key Option Menu Menu Notes JD Sweep Stop Frequency Programs the stop frequency JD Sweep Sweep Time Programs the sweep time JD Sweep Marker Programs the marker frequency JD Sweep Trigger Baseline Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode JD
111. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Bandwidth sets the sample clock rate which generates the noise It also serves as a simple tool to limit the bandwidth of the noise to a know value Note that while generating noise bear in mind that the noise is generated in a certain memory size and it is being repeated over and over until the function is disabled Therefore the noise is not really random as is the pure translation of the word Reset Parameters Resets the gaussian pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults 3 33 8101 8102 User Manual Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3 34 Gong Editor 1 ez r Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level RSC Start pts Max 32767 Cycles a Manual Scale A Ex End pts 11023 Min ES if fi In general the Model 8102 cannot by itself create arbitrary waveforms If you want to use arbitrary waveforms you must first load them into the instrument The 8102 is supplied with waveform creation and editing called ArbConnection Besides waveform generation ArbConnection has instrument control features pulse composer and many other features that will be described separately Figure 3 14 shows an example of a waveform that was created with the ArbConnection Once the waveform is created on the screen downloading it to the 8102 is just a click of a mouse away Detailed information on the str
112. OY EE 4 19 ae Cd em er ree eee rr or ere nO a Cee eon aren rere ree rer nee a 4 20 Contents continued The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panels AAA 4 22 The System Pas A nenn 4 23 Genera E 4 23 Ree 4 24 The Composers Panels ceci e eeeeeeeegeegeek See SE ARA EEEEEENNR AE EES E 4 25 JE WEE COMPOST asia 4 25 A A ta ue at Team eh cee E tp ee ail eres 4 32 The Waveform SCre Gn da 4 33 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor sssssnnessseeenerrrreenrereenrrnnersserrrrrrnne 4 34 Writing EQUaONS EE 4 36 Equation CONVE ION EE 4 37 TYPING Ke EL EE 4 38 Lee E e 4 39 Combining WAVE OMS dci 4 43 The Pulse Composer E 4 45 The Command e EE 4 63 Logging SCPI COMMANOS E 4 63 Remote Programming Reference ccccccccsssseeeseeeeeeseenssseeeeecceeseensesseeeeneeeeseseeeenssanennoeees 5 1 Ven RE e hat teen om cant cies Mite leads a cans 5 3 Introduction SGPT ET 5 3 Command Kee EE 5 4 Command SEPA A a is 5 4 The MIN and MAX Parameters cccccscescssssssescsescsescsseecscsesssecacsessacsesescesatseeeeaeaeieees 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting ici iii 5 5 Query Response FOME 5 5 SEPT Comma d BREET 5 5 IEEE STD 488 2 Common COMMANM AS isa oi 5 5 A A a a 5 6 Tue EE 5 6 Discrete Parameters soc il it la ladies 5 6 Boolean EE 5 6 Arbitrary Block Parameters ooccooocccocccccccononononcccnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnrnnnnnn nn n cnn nn nr enana ccnnnnn 5 6 Binary Block ta eege da 5 7 SCPI Syntax and Styles isos ege EEEE ee EE eeE Nege Ee
113. Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 37 3333333MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 85 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 56MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 56MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 86 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 56 0000001MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 7 47 8101 8102 User Manual 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 56 0000001 MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 87 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup
114. Output On Ch2 Amplitude 6V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 11 for DMM reading of OV 20mV Setup 6 Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Output On Mode Modulation Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 12 for DMM reading of OV 5mV Setup 7 Base Line Offset Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 6V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 9 for DMM reading of OV 20mV 7 31 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 8 Offset Adjustments Setup 9 Setup 10 7 32 Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the D
115. Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Exponent sets the exponent factor for the exponential function Setting the exponent to a negative value inverts the exponential function Changing the default exponent value to a different number requires re calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector Reset Parameters Resets the exponential pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults DC Wave The DC waveform is useful applications requiring simply an accurate DC level There are certain menus that provide access to the DC waveform parameters These are DC Level programs the level of the DC output function The amplitude is programmed in units of volts and generated continuously at the output connector in a similar way as a power supply generates its output Note however that the amplitude is calibrated when the output is terminated into 50Q load impedance Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters R
116. Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Chi Amplitude 2V Ch1 Offset 3V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 63 for DMM reading of 3V 15mV Setup 15 5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 7 13 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 16 Setup 17 Setup 18 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 5V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 64 for DMM reading of 5V 25mV 7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 7V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 65 for DMM reading of 7V 35mV Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Du
117. Sweep Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude JD Sweep Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset B FSK FSK Data Displays and edits FSK data table C FSK CW Frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency D FSK Shifted Frequency Programs the shifted frequency JD FSK Baud Programs the baud frequency JD FSK Marker Programs the marker position JD FSK Trigger Baseline Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode JD FSK Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude JD FSK Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset B PSK PSK Type Programs the PSK type PSK BPSK QPSK OQPSK pi 4DQPSK 8PSK and 16PSK C PSK PSK Data Displays and edits PSK data table D PSK CW Frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency JD PSK Start Phase Programs the start phase JD PSK Shifted Phase Programs the shifted phase JD PSK Baud Programs the baud frequency JD PSK Marker Programs the marker position JD PSK Trigger Baseline Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode JD PSK Amplitude Programs the CW Amplitude JD PSK Offset Programs the CW amplitude offset ID denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial Table 3 Front Panel Run Mode Menus Soft TOP 2 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes B Run Mode Provides access to 8102 Run Mode options Continuous Triggered Gated and Counted Burst A Continuous Selects the continuous run mode B Triggered Selects the triggered run mode Provides access
118. TEIN tia dada 6 4 Recommended Test FODINA 6 4 ld ee 6 4 Frequency ACCUraCy EE 6 4 Frequency Accuracy Internal ReferencCe oooomcccinonncccnnnscccoonnnaccncnnnnnnccncnnnn crean 6 5 Frequency Accuracy External 10MHz Reference ooocomococosnocisencranennrnnsnnnrocnncroonanono 6 5 eelef ACCUACY EE 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DAC e 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DDS OIE sd a 6 6 UEL E 6 7 Offset Accuracy Ber E 6 7 Offset Accuracy DDS QUIPU scan il do 6 8 Squarewave Characteristics cuesta 6 8 Squarewave E S acess tec acy crease ctiee oie nia aa aaron 6 8 Skew Between Channels ona lie dead 6 9 vi Contents continued Sinewave CHALAGICIISTICS ege a aba 6 9 Sinewave Distortions DAC Output EE 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DDS Output ssc iii dida 6 11 Sinewave Flatness DAC Outpul ccccceecceeesseesseceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeesnaneesnaeenenanenenanenes 6 11 Sinewave Flatness DDS Output 6 12 Trigger operation Characters ui das 6 12 Trigger Gate and Burst Charactertetlce trett t nennn nenene nne 6 13 Mixed Trigger Advance Test eiii idas 6 13 Delayed Trigger ENEE 6 15 Re trigger Characteristics aint 6 16 TAI MI ia 6 17 A A 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics oooooocnncccinncinonccononcccnoncccnoncncnnnncnnnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnccnnns 6 18 FM Standard Waveforms EE 6 18 Triggered FM Standard Waveforms ooococonncccnonccononoconononononecnnannnnnnnn nn name nana nr rana 6
119. TION This product is intended for use by qualified persons who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read the operating information carefully before using the product Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on power cables connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standard Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60 VDC are present When using test fixtures keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Carefully read the Safety Precautions instructions that are supplied with your test fixtures Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables Only qualified service personnel should perform maintenance The instrument has been inspected for mechanical and electrical performance before shipment from the factory It is free of physical defects and in perfect electrical order Check the instrument for damage in transit and perform the electrical procedures outlined in the section entitled Unpacking and Initial Inspection Power Requirements Grounding Requirements Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment Configuring the Instrument 2 Power Requirements The function generator may be operated from a wide range of mains voltage 85 to 265 Vac Voltage selection is automatic and
120. TPut SYNC POSition lt position gt Description This command will program the 8102 SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER mode only 5 15 8101 8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt position gt 0 to 1e6 1 Numeric 0 Will set the SYNC position in waveform points The Integer sync position can be programmed in increments of 4 only points minimum The range is extended to 2e6 1 when option 2 is installed 512k memory size is standard Response The 8102 will return the present SYNC position value OUTPut SYNC SOURce 1 2 Description This command will program the 8102 source of the SYNC output Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 2 Discrete 1 Will set the source for the SYNC output 1 selects channel 1 as the source 2 selects channel 2 as the source Response The 8102 will return the present SYNC source value OUTPut FILTer NONE 25M 50MH 60M 120M Description This command will select which filter is connected to the 8102 output Observe the following restrictions when you try to use this command 1 Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform In fact the default waveform shape is sine Therefore filter selection will be available for use only after you select a different waveform or change the output mode to use 2 Filters are placed before the output amplifier Therefore do not expect the filters
121. Table 5 6 Run Mode Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 1 TRIGger IMMediate BURG STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 DEL av STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 GATE STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 LEVel 5 to 5 1 6 SOURce ADVance BUS EXTernal MIXed EXT SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1H Description This command will set the output in continuous operation and interrupted operation The run mode commands will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to interrupted operation 5 50 Remote Programming Reference Run Mode Commands Parameters Name Type Default Description ON Discrete ON Disables all interrupted modes and forces the continuous run mode OFF Discrete Select the interrupted run mode While in this switch option you can program the 8102 to operate in triggered gated or counted burst run modes Response The 8102 will return OFF or ON depending on the selected option TRIGger BURSt OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the counted burst run mode on and off This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT CONT OFF Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the burst run mode off ON Discrete Enables the counted burst run mode Burst count is progra
122. The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Autoline The Autoline command lets you draw straight line segments To draw a line the left mouse button at the start point Click again at the next point and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Sketch The Sketch command lets you draw free hand segments To draw a line using this command click and hold the left mouse button at the start point Release the mouse button when you want to stop and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Smooth The Smooth command lets you smooth out rough transitions on your waveform This is done mathematically by multiplying waveform coordinates by the non linear portion of a cubic parabola The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform that are bound by anchors Anchor operation is described later in this chapter Place the anchors on the left and right of your waveform ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels segment and select the Smooth command The waveform will change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a parabolic curve Note that small segments with fast transitions when combined with parabolic expressions have tendencies to generate even larger transitions Therefore make sure you omit such sections of the waveform when you use this operation Filter The Filter used with this command is moving average This is done by recalculating each po
123. To reset the Model 8102 to factory defaults use the Factory Rest option in the Utility menu Recommended test equipment for troubleshooting calibration and performance checking is listed in Table 6 1 below Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required characteristics Table 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter LT342 LeCroy package Distortion Analyzer 6900B Krohn Hite Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Freq Counter 6020R Tabor Electronics Spectrum Analyzer E4411 HP Pulse Generator with 8500 Tabor Electronics manual trigger Test Procedures Frequency Accuracy 6 4 Use the following procedures to check the Model 8102 against the specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what acceptable limits for the test are If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem Frequency accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the internal oscillators Both channels same the same output frequency and the same reference oscillators and therefore the accuracy is tested on channel 1 only Performance Checks Test Procedures Fr
124. Trigger button until you first see the burst of 5 sine waveforms Lapsed time should be 5 seconds Test Results Pass Fail 4 Modify oscilloscope setting to Auto or Normal and observe that bursts of 5 sine cycles appear at 10us intervals Test Results Pass Fail 6 14 Performance Checks Test Procedures Delayed Trigger Equipment Function generator 50 T connector Counter Characteristics ArbConnection CAD Preparation 1 Configure the Function generator as follows Amplitude 1V Frequency 1 MHz Trigger Mode Triggered Wave Squarewave 2 Place the T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one side of the T to the 8102 TRIG IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel A input of the counter 3 Connect the 8102 output to channel B input of the counter 4 Configure the counter to Tl A to B measurements 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 99 6 Configure the 8102 channel 1 only as follows SCLK 200 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level OV Trigger Delay On Delay As required for the test Amplitude 5V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger delay tests using Tables 6 15 Table 15 Trigger De
125. US FUNC PULSE POS CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF Double Delay The Double Delay parameter programs the delay between the two adjacent pulses This parameter is active only when the double pulse mode is turned on 3 51 8101 8102 User Manual Pulse Design Limitations 3 52 Sync Position The Sync Position parameter programs the position of the sync output along the pulse cycle The position is the only parameter that is programmed in units of waveform points The location of the sync is visible on the screen below the pulse icon and the number of points that are used for building the pulse shape is shown below the horizontal axis Channel State The channel state comes in handy when programming pulse parameters for one channel only This option is specifically useful because you may want to program one channel while the other channel was already programmed before and its parameters may collide with the new parameters that you are programming on another channel When you select the Channel State OFF option you may freely program all parameters on the other channel and the OFF channel will not be computed but will generate a dc level at its output terminal Keeping in mind that the pulse is created digitally using memory points one should understand there are limitations of creating such pulses that evolve from this system These limitations are summarized below 1 Step increment defines resolut
126. UT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC ARB Pos 0 LEVEL 1 60U _ i 2 e ry wer WIN f A J F A 50n TTL 50n J MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Figure 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Frequency 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the Sample Clock parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to dial the new sample clock frequency value 3 Press M for MHz k for kHz x1 for Hz or m for mHz to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the sample clock frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only 3 14 Programming the Amplitude and Offset Using the Instrument 3 Programming the Amplitude and Offset lay Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the sample clock frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Output amplitude and offset can be programmed independently and separately for each channel Amplitude and offset are set within windows so before you select values for these parameters make sure you do not exceed the limits Amplitude and offset can be programmed independently as long as the following relationship between the two values is not exceeded Amplitude 2 The first thing
127. User Manual Models 8101 8102 100 MHz Single Dual Function Arbitrary Generators Publication No 0901013 Tabor Electronics Ltd Tabor Electronics Ltd P O Box 404 Tel Hanan Israel 20302 Tel 972 4 821 3393 FAX 972 4 821 3388 PUBLICATION DATE January 13 2009 Copyright 2005 by Tabor Electronics Ltd Printed in Israel All rights reserved This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher WARRANTY STATEMENT Products sold by Tabor Electronics Ltd are warranted to be free from defects in workmanship or materials Tabor Electronics Ltd will at its option either repair or replace any hardware products which prove to be de fective during the warranty period You are a valued customer Our mission is to make any necessary repairs in a reliable and timely manner Duration of Warranty The warranty period for this Tabor Electronics Ltd hardware is three years except software and firmware products designed for use with Tabor Electronics Ltd Hardware is warranted not to fail to execute its pro gramming instructions due to defect in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of delivery to the initial end user Return of Product Authorization is required from Tabor Electronics before you send us your product for service or calibration Call your nearest Tabor Electronics support facility If you are unsure where to call contact Tabor Elec
128. a from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cleared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed Chapter 6 Performance Checks Title Page Whats IA DAIS Chapters entrara tipa 6 3 PEMONMANCE GNEOKS in cio is 6 3 Environmental COnditOAS Wim iii 6 3 WTO EE EE eege 6 3 Initial Instrument Setting iros da 6 4 Recommended Test Equipment eet deusbeeedereh Ee ee EE det deeg 6 4 Test Procedures us eetathateaestaluelediicedelectaledelnanmaderelualelectg eateveionaes 6 4 EIERE ENEE St ege 6 4 Frequency Accuracy Internal Reference comoomssnnseracssarrerronsecerne rosana 6 5 Frequency Accuracy External 10MHz Reference ommmcmcmmssamcnoiisnrrecrossarnene roscar ross 6 5 uge de Ee E 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DAC Output anio vcici cccbecescaneceeectcaneksaxseennannbsccapedaidccttadstnduaveseatieane 6 6 Amplitude Accuracy DDS Diputada 6 6 EEN aaa 6 7 Offset Accuracy DAC QuUipul icons ias 6 7 Offset Accuracy DDS Output EE 6 8 Squarewave CharacioriStOS cs sidra 6 8 Squarewave CHECKS iii eee 6 8 skew Between Channels viii iio 6 9 Sinewave Characteristics EN 6 9 Sinewave Distortions DAC Output eerste nn tea 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output iria 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DDS Output EEN 6 11 Sinewave erneiert dto 6 11 Sinewave Flatness DDS QUE sia ds 6 12 Trigger operation Characteristics AEN 6 12 Trigger Gate and Burst Characteristics coooncooccccnnncconnn
129. a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to ramp waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the ramp waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Delay sets the delay time for the ramp start The delay is programmed as percent of the ramp period Rise programs the ramp rise time The rise time is programmed as percent of the ramp period Fall programs the ramp fall time The fall time is pro
130. al banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP53 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 36 500mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP54 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV Setup 37 100mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 7 43 8101 8102 User Manual 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 100mV Adj
131. al banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 1V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP14 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV Note reading Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 1V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP14 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV note reading 5 Repeat steps Setup 17 and Setup 18 until errors are balanced between the steps Amplitude The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the 1p specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude Adjustments accuracy is an issue Setup 19 10V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Cha
132. ameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 200e 9 to20 Numeric 200e 9 Programs the re trigger period Response The 8102 will return the present re trigger period value 5 54 Remote Programming Reference 9 Auxiliary Commands Auxiliary The auxiliary commands control auxiliary functions that are not Commands directly related to the main function of the arbitrary waveform generator however constitute an important part of operating the 8102 These commands can transform the 8102 into a stand alone pulse generator The auxiliary commands are listed in Table 5 7 Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Table 5 7 Auxiliary Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Digital Pulse Commands AUXiliary PULSe DEL au 0 to 10 0 DOUBle STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 DELay 0 to 1e3 1e 3 HIGH 0 to 1e3 1e 3 LEVel HIGH 7 992 to 8 5 LOW 8 to 7 992 0 PERiod 80e 9 to 1e6 80e 9 to 2e6 with the 2 M option 10e 3 POLARity NORMal COMPlemented INVerted NORM STATe OFF ON O 1 1 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 1e3 1e 3 TRAiling 0 to 1e3 1e 3 5 55 8101 8102 User Manual Digital Pulse Use the following command for programming the pulse parameters p a The pulse is created digitally however it closely simulates an rogramming analog pulse generator so pulse parameters are pro
133. amming be used as the modulating waveforms Standard and Arbitrary The standard waveforms are built in a library of waveforms and could be used anytime without external control The arbitrary waveforms 5 38 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands must be loaded into a special FM arbitrary waveform memory and only then can be used as a modulating waveform FM DEViation lt deviation gt Description This programs the deviation range around the carrier frequency The deviation range is always symmetrical about the carrier frequency Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt deviation gt 10e 3 to Numeric 100e3 Programs the deviation range around the carrier 100e6 frequency in units of Hz Response The 8102 will return the present deviation frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRiangle SQUare RAMP ARB Description This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform ARB Discrete Selects an
134. and output connectors operating modes output type output state and front panel indicators The Model 8102 has 3 BNC connectors on its front panel two main outputs and one SYNC output Each connector on the front panel has an LED associated with it indicating when the output is active LED on or when inactive LED off The function of each of the front panel connectors is described in the following paragraphs The main output connectors generate fixed standard waveforms to 100MHz user arbitrary and modulated waveforms The arbitrary waveforms are sampled with sampling clock rate to 250 MS s CW from the modulated function is programmable to 100 MHz Output source impedance is 500 hence the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 50Q load resistance If the output is connected to a different load resistance determine the actual amplitude from the following equation 500 Vout 2 V prog SOQ RL The output amplitude is doubled when the output impedance is above roughly 10 kQ The SYNC output generates a single or multiple TTL pulses for synchronizing other instruments i e an oscilloscope to the output waveform The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform The location of the pulse sync along the waveform is programmable The SYNC output is used as marker output when the 8102 is programmed to one of the modulation functions The source of the sync can be programmed to source
135. and to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form upper case and the long form upper and lower case The PARAMETER FORM column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets lt gt If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets these are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options 5 7 8101 8102 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commande List Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Instrument Control Commands OUTPut LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 STATE OFF ON 0 1 0 SYNC STATE OFF ON 0 1 0 POSition 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2e6 1 with option 2 0 SOURce 1 2 1 Pl Ter LLPASs NONE 25M 50M 60M 120M NONE SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal INT FREQuency CW 10e 3 to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 RASTer 1 5 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e7 MOL Tage LEVel AMPLitude 16e 3 to 16 MINimum MAXimum 5 OFFSet 7 992 to 7 992 0 PHASe OF FSet 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2e6 1 with opti
136. andard waveforms are used both channels share the same run mode as well as delayed trigger and re trigger settings On the other hand each channel can have a unique set of waveform amplitude offset and waveform parameters without interference between the channels When both channels are programmed for standard waveforms the skew between the channels is minimal Refer to Appendix A for the skew between channels specification Figure 1 7 shows typical front panel for the standard waveform display and Figure 1 8 shows typical standard waveform panel as displayed when ArbConnection is used for remote programming Getting Started 1 100MHz FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 PROGRAM ON OFF CHI cH2 oureur SYNC M mie OOO Triangle p Square ODA Pulse Sinc Gaussian m Exponential CJ E DC BO uns e ONTINUDUS MENU LOCAL MANTRIG e L H Bee SS q b O i b A A Ki SS TTL a on son Figure 1 8 ArbConnection Example Typical Standard Waveforms Panel Arbitrary Waveforms One of the main functions of the Tabor model 8102 is generating real life waveforms These are normally not sinewaves and squares but user specific waveforms Generating such waveforms require external utilities such as MatLAB or even spreadsheets but having the program alone is not enough for the 8102 Once the waveform is computed and defined it must be converted to a format which the instrument can accept and coordin
137. ands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument SCPI is an ASCIl based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system OUTPut FILTer LPASs NONE 25M 50M ALL STATe OFF ON OUTPut is the root keyword of the command FlLTer and STATe are second level keywords LPASs is third level keyword A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 5 3 8101 8102 User Manual Command Format Command Separator 5 4 The format used to show commande in this manual is shown below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability use the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms Use upper or lowercase letters Therefore FREQ FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other
138. arbitrary waveform as the modulating shape The waveform must be designed and downloaded to the FM arbitrary modulating waveform memory before one can use this option Response The 8102 will return SIN TRI SQU RAMP or ARB depending on the selected function shape setting FM FREQuency lt fm_freq gt Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description 5 39 8101 8102 User Manual lt fm_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform 350e3 in units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating waveforms only is affected Response The 8102 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM FREQuency RASTer lt arb_fm_freq gt Description This command will set the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary modulating waveform Arbitrary modulating waveforms must be created in an external utility and downloaded to the FM arbitrary waveform memory before this function can be used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt arb_fm_freq 1 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary gt 2 5e6 modulating waveform in units of S s Response The 8102 will return the present sample clock
139. ase hops between two pre programmed phases The initial phase can be programmed from 0 to 360 the shifted phase can also be programmed through the same range The PSK sequence is designed in a PSK table that can either be loaded from the front panel or downloaded from a remote interface from a utility such as ArbConnection An example of the PSK table as created in ArbConnection is shown in Figure 3 24 When you select PSK modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 25 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification PSK Data defines the sequence of which the phase will toggle FSK data is stored in an external table The length of the table is limited from 1 to 4096 toggle sequences The PSK Data table contains a list of Oe and 1 s which determine the sequence 0 defines start phase and 1 defines the shifted phase CW Frequency defines the frequency of the carrier waveform In this case the CW frequency will also be used as the idle frequency Using this standard PSK function the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine Start Phase defines the initial start phase Note that the start and stop phase only define the phase difference between these values and not fixed values of which the generator will adhere to Shifted Phase defines the phase of which the generator will shift when logic level 1 is sensed at the trigger input Note that the start and stop phase onl
140. ass 4 MS s 4000 1 000 kHz lt 0 1 40 Ms s 4000 10 00 kHz lt 0 1 200 Ms s 2000 100 00 kHz lt 0 1 Sinewave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DAC Output Preparation 1 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the spectrum analyzer input Use 500 and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the 8102 as follows Amplitude 5V Output On Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sinewave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 10 Table 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test 8102 Freq Reading Spectrum Analyzer Analyzer Settings amp Results 2 Settings Limits PELA T e eee ro ER SOMHz gt 30dBc 10M 200M TI 100 MHz gt 25dBc 10M 250M 6 10 Performance Checks Test Procedures Sinewave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DDS Output Preparation 1 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the spectrum analyzer input Use 50 Q and 20 dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the 8102 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitude 5V Output On CW Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sinewave spectral purity DDS Waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6 11 Table 11 DDS CW Spectral Purity Test 8102 Reading Spectrum Analyzer Settings amp Results esa CW Freg Limits Start Stop CH1 CH2
141. ates downloaded to the generator memory for re play Arbitrary waveforms are stored as digital XY coordinates in a special memory normally referred to as working memory Each coordinate is referred to as waveform point or waveform sample The waveform is better defined if it has many waveform points For Output Type 8101 8102 User Manual 1 20 PROGRAM ON OFF GP omg FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Fon ou OUTPUT SYN Sample Clock Active Segment FRE BASE HO A Eost CLOCK Sec ENT KL E e 3 m PATTERNS OFF o sis de W h Kr bh MW I PA j PA 50n 50n example with only 8 point sine waveform will hardly resemble the shape of a sinewave and will look more like an up down staircase but with 100 points the same sine waveform will look almost perfect The final shape of the waveform is produced by a DAC Digital to Analog Converter The waveform samples are clocked to the DAC at a rate defined by the sample clock frequency The output of the DAC converts the digital data to analog levels and passes on the signal to the output amplifier The shape of the function is more or less the same as it comes out of the DAC except it could be amplified or attenuated depending on the require amplitude level The size of the working memory is limited to the way the hardware was designed The 8102 has 512k points available as standard to build one or more waveforms There is no need to use the entire memory for only one waveform Th
142. ates output waveforms between two gating signal Only hardware triggers can be used to open and close the gate The gate opens on the first trigger transition and closes on the second transition Trigger level and trigger slope are programmable Trigger delay and re trigger do not apply to the gated run mode Note that there is different behavior of the output in gated mode for standard and arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency the other waveforms idle on dc level only The delayed trigger function is exactly the same as the trigger mode except a programmable delay inhibits signal output for a pre determined period after a valid trigger The delay time defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger hardware or software to output The delay is programmable in steps of 20ns from 200ns to 21 seconds The trigger delay can be applied to all run modes continuous trigger and burst The Re trigger run mode requires only one trigger command to start a sequence of triggered or counted burst of signals The re trigger delay defines the time that will lapse from the end of a signal to the start of the next signal Re trigger delay is programmable in steps of 20ns from 200ns to 21 seconds 8101 8102 User Manual Trigger Source The Model 8102 can be triggered from a number of sources 1 Rear panel connector de
143. ation schemes PSK PHASe lt start_phase gt Description This programs the start phase of the carrier waveform The start phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 0 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_phase gt 0O to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value PSK PHASe SHIFted lt shift_phase gt Description This programs the shifted phase The phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_phase gt 0to360 Numeric 180 Programs the shift phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 8102 will return the present shift phase value PSK RATE lt rate gt Description This allows the user to select PSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the PSK data array are clocked causing the output phase to hop from start to shifted phase values and visa versa Note that this command is dedicated for programming the PSK modulation function only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the phase shifts from start 10e6 to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response 5 47 8101 8102 User Manual The 8102 will return the present baud value The returned value will be in standard scientif
144. ators Adjustments Setup 33 100mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 7 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP31for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Setup 34 50mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 8 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP32 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV Setup 35 1V Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate 7 21 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 36 Setup 37 7 22 the 8102 output at the
145. bed in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION HTA GP ELEC OAL GOA UGNGIGItnN CAUTION EE EES ALWAYS PERFORM DISASSEMBLY REPAIR AND ES CLEANING AT A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION Performance Do not attempt to calibrate the instrument before you verify that there is no problem with the functionality of the product A complete set of Checks specification is listed in Appendix A If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be tested to find the source of the problem In case there is a reasonable suspicion that an electrical problem exist within the 8102 perform a complete performance checks as given in Chapter 6 to verify proper operation of the instrument Environmental The 8102 can operate from 0 C to 50 C Adjustments should be We performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature Conditions of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Turn on the power to the 8102 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the adjustment procedure If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure M
146. brary of built in standard waveforms The library includes Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Gaussian and DC waveforms Each waveform has one or more parameters that can be adjusted for the required characteristics of the output For example phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and duty cycle can be adjusted for the square waveform The pulse waveform can be adjusted for rise and fall time as well as width and delay Parameters that are associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when the waveform is selected Note that by clicking a button in this group you are immediately updating the 8102 output with this waveform shape Parameters The parameters group contains buttons that control the source of the 10MHz reference and the setting of the output frequency for the standard waveforms function The 10MHz Ref controls toggle between an internal and external references The default setting is internal which provides frequency accuracy of 1ppm If such accuracy is not sufficient for your application click on the external option but make sure that a reference source is applied to the rear panel connector otherwise the accuracy of the output will deteriorate completely The Frequency control lets you program the output frequency of the selected waveform shape The frequency parameter may be modified when the LED illuminates You can use the dial keyboard or the N keys to
147. cccononcccnnnnononannncnnnnnnns 4 40 4 24 Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion cccccccccncnnnnnnnnnnns 4 41 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave sssssseeeesss 4 42 4 26 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Upper and Lower Sidebands 4 43 4 27 Combining Waveforms into e EE 4 44 4 28 the Pulse Composer Screen EEN 4 46 4229 the Pulse Edi ria e 4 48 4 30 the Pulse Editor Options iii aaaeidanapeheneeetudeleietnes 4 49 4 31 the Pulse Composer Toolbar ICONS ANEN 4 50 4 32 Complete Pulse Train DESIGN cocos ana aaa daa 4 51 4 33 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Desen 4 51 4 34 Selecting Pulse Editor Options E 4 52 4 35 Using the Pulse Nara aa 4 54 4 36 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example ooooonnnnocccccnnnccononcccncnnnnnnnnnannnnnoncnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 4 56 4 37 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Exvample AAA 4 57 4 38 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Exvample AAA 4 59 4 39 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Exvample AAA EEN 4 60 4 40 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example ooooonccoccccccnncccononoccnnnncconanannnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncncnnnnns 4 61 4 41 the Pulse Editor Download Summary cccccccccnnnncononcccnnncnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnn nr rnnnnnn nn ccnnnnn 4 62 4 42 ME COMME as ia 4 63 4 43 Log File Example eaea a o dia 4 64 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format oooonnococcc nncconccanocccononc
148. cess the offset parameter B Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the amplitude or offset parameters the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter MENU GP 1 00MH FUNCTION ARSITRARY GENERATOR WS8102 PROGRAM ON OFF cni oe burput SYNC 22 CH1 Mara Amplitude o A po ES Salag D Q Active 75 000 000 DES 5 0 np 3 6 weep rey yer D pg MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC ARBE POS 0 LEVEL 1 60U L z Q z z RUN TRIG SRC CHi SLOPE POSITIVE HE pac EE ey Oy tO PA PA 50N TL 50n d el Figure 7 Programming Amplitude and Offset 3 16 Using the Instrument Selecting a Run Mode Selecting a Run The Model 8102 offers four run modes Continuous Triggered Mode Gated and Burst The selected waveform is repeated continuously when the instrument is set to operate in Continuous mode The continuous output can be turned on and off from a remote interface and thus controlling the start and stop of the waveform from an external source The operating mode defaults to continuous after reset Triggered Gated and Burst modes require an external signal to initiate output cycles In some case an internal trigger generator
149. circumference of a unit diameter circle per which equals the programmed horizontal range f which equals 1 per omg which equals 2 pi per and numerals in the range of 1E 20 to 1E 20 There are three classes of precedence raise to power has the highest precedence multiply and divide come second and have the lowest precedence Parentheses may be used to change the order of precedence The following table summarize the mathematical expressions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with the Equation Editor Equation Editor Operands A Raise to the power i Multiply Divide Add A Subtract Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm pi Gr Circumference of unit diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points l per omg Q 2 n per amp Amplitude in units of points or seconds sin x The sine of x cos x The cosine of x tan x The tangent of x ctn x The cotangent of x log x The base IO logarithm of x In x The natural base e logarithm of x abs x The absolute value of x 1E420 lt gt 1E 20 Numerals equation constants x argument mathematical expression After you get familiar with the operands and conventions you can commence with a few simple equations and see what they do to your waveform screen Once you ll get the feel you ll be able to 4 37 8101 8102 User Manual Typing Equations 4 38 explore your own creativity to generate much more com
150. conannnnnnccnnnnnnnnn acc ncnnnnnos 5 30 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation ooooccoccccccnnccccnncnnaonccnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 5 30 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation ENEE 5 31 5 4 Segment Address and Size Example unn 5 33 5 5 O KE ER PROCS EE 5 69 71 Calibfation PASSWOMG e eS 7 5 122 Galibration PM ado 7 5 xiv 8101 8102 User Manual 7 3 Sottware Version CEN a a ias e id 7 50 1 4 The NET Config UY asocio di 7 51 7 5 Check for Progress Bar Movement Ak 7 52 7 6 WW8102 has been Detected on the LAN Network 7 52 7 7 The Firmware Update Dialog BOX acicate dera 7 53 7 8 Firmware Update PAU acrdald iia 7 54 7 9 Firmware Update Completed DEE 7 54 XV Chapter 1 Getting Started Title Page What s in This GMA PIS aii a tias ie 1 3 ni ON 1 3 3102 Feature e e Lu e CES a eAeees 1 3 ArbConnecthon Feature UAM A a a a 1 4 ai Tele isa lili 1 6 Safety Consid rati NS aca ies 1 8 S pplied ACCOSSOMES iii da 1 8 PDS CIBC AT OIG Aa EEE Sacer cena aes chaaae aiden E E tl ancateaes 1 8 Functional PESCIrIDTION EE 1 9 Front Panel Connectors and Indicators 0 cccciceicseccesadeeseteeiens nicas 1 9 Main Output Channels 1 and L ocononccccnnnnoncccnnonannncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnc cnn nn nannn cnn nnnnenennnnos 1 9 SYNC ON EE 1 9 Front Panel GOTO ua as da 1 9 Rear Panel Input amp Output Connectors AEN 1 12 TR GN td Aceh de ae tea eo la de costo ll ls la 1 12 REF Nvo di dr 1 13 LAN R
151. crete NORM Programs normal pulse output COMPlemeted Discrete Programs complemented pulse output INVerted Discrete Programs an inverted pulse output Response The 8102 will return NORM COMP or INV depending on the present polarity setting AUXiliary PULse OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to disable a specific channel from calculating pulse parameters This is specifically useful for accelerating pulse computation for channels that are needed for pulse generation Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles pulse computation for a specific channel on and off Response The 8102 will return 0 or 1 depending on the present state setting AUXiliary PULse TRANsition lt rise gt Description This command will program the interval it will take the pulse to transition from its low to high level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Will set the rise time parameter Note that the sum of all parameters including the rise time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters 5 59 8101 8102 User Manual Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value in units of seconds AUXiliary PULse TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command will program the interval it will take
152. ction in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Phase sets the start phase of the output waveform You will not be able to see any change in the waveform if you generate a continuous triangular waveform however if you place the generator in triggered run mode the output will start the triangle wave generation from a point defined by the Phase parameter The start phase is programmed in units of degree Reset Parameters Resets the triangular wave parameters to their original factory defaults 3 27 8101 8102 User Manual 3 28 Ramp Wave The ramp waveform is a special case of the triangular waveform with a slight difference the ramp can be adjusted for its rise and fall times The ramp waveform is a very common waveform and is required for numerous applications however not being a true ramp generator the ramp parameters are computed and programmed as percent of the ramp period The waveform is computed every time a parameter is modified 1000 points are allocated for the ramp shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The ramp waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the resolution of the parameters is lost to
153. ctive channel with the INST SEL command before you download segment table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of segments is 1 maximum number of segments is 16k 3 Maximum segment size depends on your installed option With the basic 8102 you can program maximum 512k in one segment 4 Segment table data has 32 bit values of which are used for segment size Therefore Data for each segment must have 4 bytes 5 The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 6 The Model 8102 has no control over data sent to its segment table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partition Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the segment table 5 34 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 9 Modulated This group is used to control the modulated waveforms and their Waveforms respective parameters Note that the modulation can be turned off to create continuous carrier waveform CW The following Control modulation schemes can be selected and controlled FM AM FSK Commands PSK Sweep The modulation commands are summarized in Table 5 5 Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where a
154. ctive action Remove the 8102 from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode 5 Changing operating mode from triggered to continuous when the 8102 is set to single sequence advance or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 8102 is set to automatic sequence advance mode Corrective action Observe the 8102 advance mode while setting sequence advance 222 Data out of range Parameter data which followed a specific header could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator 224 lllegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command An invalid parameter choice may have been used 300 Device specific error This is the generic device dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors A device specific error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 311 Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument s memory 350 Queue Overflow The error queue is full because more than 5 73 8101 8102 User Manual 5 74 30 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed 410 Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the output buffer but the output buffer contained dat
155. d as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned VOLTage OFFSet lt offs gt Description This command programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform The offset is calibrated when the source impedance is 500 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Will set the offset of the output waveform in units of 7 992 volts Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude does not exceed the specified window Response The 8102 will return the present offset value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned PHASe OFFSet lt phase_offs gt Description This command programs the start phase offset between channels 1 and 2 in units of waveform points Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase_offs gt Oto1e6 1 Numeric 0 Will set the phase offset between the two channels Integer Channel 1 trails channel 2 edge The range is only extended to 2e6 1 when option 2 is installed 512k is standard Response The 8102 will return the present phase offset value 8101 8102 User Manual FUNCTion MODE FIXed USER MODulated PULSe Description This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector It also selects one for the auxiliary functions from digital pu
156. d type SYNC output on off control and properties and start phase offset between channels Table 5 Front Panel Auxiliary Menus Soft TOP Auxiliary 2 4 Level Key Menu Function Menu Notes JD Auxiliary Provides access to the following auxiliary function Digital Pulse Generator A Pulse Generator Apply Changes Press this button to accept modifications of pulse parameters B Period Programs the period of the pulse C Delay Programs the delay from the start of the pulse D Rise Time Programs the pulse rise time parameter JD High Time Programs the pulse high time parameter JD Fall Time Programs the pulse fall time parameter JD High Level Programs the pulse high level parameter JD Low Level Programs the pulse low level parameter JD Polarity Programs the pulse polarity parameter JD Double State Toggles double pulse state on and off JD Channel State Programs the channel programmability state JD Sync Position Programs the sync pulse position parameter D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial 3 10 Using the Instrument Enabling the Outputs Enabling the For safety reasons main outputs default setting is OFF The outputs can be turned on and off using either the hot keys or the Outputs Output Menu Observe Figure 3 3 and disable or enable the main outputs using the procedure below The same procedure can be used for enabling and disabling the SYNC output The n
157. dited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing 4 Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing 5 Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 8102 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons 9 11 12 an HI oe OUTPUT SYNC P omg FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 E MENU 1 000 000 000 MHz Ce 8 rg gt MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC STD Pos o LEVEL 1 60U RUN TRIG SRC CHi SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 2 8102 Front Panel Operation 3 6 8102 Front Panel Menus Using the Instrument 3 8102 Front Panel Menus 6 Enter MAN TRIG Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2 When the 8102 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 8102 7 Cursor UP Down Left and Right Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll throug
158. djustment 4 CAL SETUP 70 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV 3VOffset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 2V Ch2 Offset 3V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 71for DMM reading of 3V 15mV 5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2 Offset 5V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 72 for DMM reading of 5V 25mV Setup 16 7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Con
159. does not require switch setting The instrument operates over the power mains frequency range of 48 to 63Hz Always verify that the operating power mains voltage is the same as that specified on the rear panel The 8102 should be operated from a power source with its neutral at or near ground earth potential The instrument is not intended for operation from two phases of a multi phase ac system or across the legs of a single phase three wire ac power system Crest factor ratio of peak voltage to rms should be typically within the range of 1 3 to 1 6 at 10 of the nominal rms mains voltage To ensure the safety of operating personnel the U S O S H A Occupational Safety and Health requirement and good engineering practice mandate that the instrument panel and enclosure be earth grounded Although BNC housings are isolated from the front panel the metal part is connected to earth ground A WARNING Do not attempt to float the output from ground as it may damage the Model 8102 and your equipment If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time or shipped to a service center proceed as directed below If repacking procedures are not clear to you or if you have questions contact your nearest Tabor Electronics Representative or the Tabor Electronics Customer Service Department 1 Repack the instrument using the wrappings packing material and accessories originally shipped with the unit If the original contai
160. e ESE Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE Common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value one indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting ESEO Summary of ESE messages is given in the following ESEO No mask Clears all bits in the register ESE1 ESB on Operation Complete ESE2 ESB on Request Control ESE4 ESB on Query Error ESE8 ESB on Device Dependent Error 5 71 8101 8102 User Manual Error Messages 5 72 ESE16 ESB on Execution Error ESE32 ESB on Command Error ESE64 ESB on User Request ESE128 ESB Power on In general whenever the 8102 receives an invalid SCPI command it automatically generates an error Errors are stored in a special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored When you have read all errors from the queue the generator responds with a 0 No error message If more than 30 errors have occurred the la
161. e Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 30 3V Amplitude Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 3V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP48 for DMM reading of 1 0606V 7mV Setup 31 1V Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 9 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP49 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 32 500mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate 7 41 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 33 Setup 34 7 42 the 8102 output at the DMM
162. e TRAC commands will affect the selected segment 2 The SYNC output will be assigned to the selected segment 5 32 Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the active segment number number gt integer only Response The 8102 will return the active segment number SEGment lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This command will partition the waveform memory to smaller segments and will speed up memory segmentation The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then just use this command to split the waveform to the appropriate memory segments In this way there is no need to define and download waveforms to individual segments Using this command segment table data is loaded to the 8102 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for large number of segment As an example the next command will generate three segments with 12 bytes of data that contains segment size information SEGment 212 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 3 segments into the segment table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 des
163. e eege A A ei 6 4 EEN EEN ENEE ee 6 5 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference ooooooocccccccnncocococcccnncccnanancccnnncnnnnnnns 6 5 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output ero ii NEE EEEE REESEN ENNEN 6 6 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy DDS Outputs corio retira ios 6 7 8101 8102 User Manual 6 6 Offset Accuracy DAC aos 6 7 6 7 Offset Accuracy DDS Output alicia ciel leticia o reed 6 8 6 8 Square wave Characteristics asadas 6 9 6 9 Sinewave Distortion DAC Output Tests 6 10 6 10 Sinewave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test 6 10 6 12 Sinewave Flatness DAC Output Test 6 12 6 13 Sinewave Flatness DDS Output Test 6 12 6 14 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics cccccscccecssseccecseseeeeesseneeeeseseeeeeessnaeeeeeees 6 13 6 15 Trigger Delay Tests iia 6 15 6 16 Re Trigger Delay Tests cum let 6 16 7 1 Recommended calibration for Adiusiments 7 4 List of Figures Chapter Title Page Ud ENTREE 1 4 1 2 AroConnection The Control Panels ooccccncccooccnnnccnncnnnononcnnnnnnanonnnononancnnnononrnnnnononarrnnnnnnnns 1 5 1 3 ArbConnection The Wave Composer ek 1 5 1 4 ArbConnection The Pulse COMPOSE kee 1 6 1 5 8 1 02 Front Panel Controls deed sende eege dE 1 10 1 65 8102 Rear Palin nacio 1 12 1 7 Typical 8102 Standard Waveforms Display 1 19 1 8 AroConnection Example Typical Standard Waveforms Panel 1 19 1 9 Typical 8102 Arbitrary Waveforms Display 1 20 1 10 ArbConnection Exam
164. e memory can be divided into smaller segments loaded with different waveforms while the instrument can be programmed to output one segment at a time The Model 8102 has separate arbitrary waveform memories for each channel and each channel can be loaded with different waveforms Channels are not limited by the number of segments and by the shape of the waveforms Figure 1 9 shows typical front panel for the arbitrary waveform display and Figure 1 10 shows typical ArbConnection panel as displayed when ArbConnection is used for remote programming el JL Jl Z PATS JUa DS moam C woa A mn cs ataa m Q i 66 399 10 000 000 OOMS 5 0 p ee Esc ENTER MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG ONT INUOUS Figure 1 9 Typical 8102 Arbitrary Waveforms Display Getting Started 1 Output Type Figure 1 10 ArbConnection Example Typical Arbitrary Waveforms Panel Using the latest DDS technology the 8102 is capable of producing Modulated an array of modulation which places this generator in line with Waveforms stand alone high performance modulation generators The 8102 can produce Sweep FSK PSK ASK AM and FM When modulation is used from one channel the other channel is 90 phase shifted specifically convenient for applications such as amp Q modulation Figure 1 11 shows a typical front panel entry for modulated waveform and Figure 1 12 shows an ArbConnection example of a modulation panel
165. e of Operation a AAA m Memory Management C Do not Override Loaded Segments z Allow Pulse Design with no Limitation EN Drun Pulse Transition Management e Allows Y stem Control Design Units Time units ms el Level Units v y Gimitincrements Cancel Tools Commands Figure 4 30 the Pulse Editor Options The Tools commands let you download pulse trains to either channel 1 or channel 2 You can also clear the entire waveform memory using the Clear memory command Di Note The Clear Memory command affects the entire waveform memory of the 8102 and therefore be careful not to erase memory segments that you ll need to use with the arbitrary function 4 49 8101 8102 User Manual The Pulse Composer Toolbar The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 31 The icons from left to right operate the following functions New waveform Open an existing waveform file Save pulse train Save pulse train As Print the screen and open the pulse editor dialog box Other icons select the current view on the screen shows channel 1 and channel 2 waveforms clear the memory and download the displayed pulse train to the active channel D uaa e tran y E Figure 4 31 the Pulse Composer Toolbar Icons
166. e that there are linear transitions required for this section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 53 The second pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the third section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 38 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new section number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there are fast transitions required for this section Therefore select the DC Intervals option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 39 ArbConnection 4 Generat
167. e top of the screen so if you are not sure which of the interfaces is selected compare the following icons to what you have on the screen Designates GPIB interface is selected and active GPIB configuration is required to communicate with your PC Designates USB interface is selected and active First connection requires USB configuration and software driver installation to communicate with your PC Select Interface LAN 10 100 BASE MODE GPIB interface Done 00000 ENU ke E 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Control from Interfac NOTE Riess Enter to select the active IP Address Subnet Mask Initializing the LAN 10 100 interface Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 FUNC MOD POS a CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface PROGRAM ON OFF CH CH2 OUTPUT SYNC gova Noes Home Noose 020 oog MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG o O O O Figure 2 1 Selecting a Remote interface 2 Designates LAN interface is selected and active LAN configuration is required to communicate with your PC GPIB configuration requires an address setting only If you intend to GPIB Configuration use more than one instrument on the bus you have to make sure each device has a unique address setting GPIB address is programmed from the front panel Utility menu as shown in Figure 2 2 To access this screen
168. e waveform The CW frequency setting is valid for all modulation types Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the carrier waveform in 100e6 units of Hz Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sine waveform Response The 8102 will return the current carrier frequency value MODulation CARRier BASeline CARRier DC Description This command will program the carrier baseline when the modulation is used in triggered mode Parameters Name Type Default Description CARRier Discrete CARR This selects the carrier as the baseline for the modulation function when operating in one of the interrupted run modes The output will generate continuous none modulated sinusoidal waveform CW until triggered upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous CW DC Discrete This selects DC level as the baseline for the modulation function when operating in one of the interrupted run modes The output will generate continuous DC until triggered upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous DC level Response The 8102 will return CARR or DC depending on the present carrier baseline setting FM Modulation Use the following command for programming the FM parameters E FM control is internal There are two types of waveforms that can Prog r
169. e your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Pulse Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current Pulse Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes Edit Commands The Edit commands are used for adding or removing pulse train sections Use these commands to Append Delete Insert or Undo last operation The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Append Section The Append Section command lets you append a new section at the end of the pulse train Only one new section can be appended at the end of the train If an empty section already exists the append command will alert for an error New sections are always appended at the end of the pulse train Insert Section The insert Section command lets you insert a new section in between sections that were already designed Only one new section can be inserted at the middle of the train If an empty section already exists the insert command will alert for an error Delete Section The Delete Section command lets you remove sections from the pulse train without affecting the rest of the train If you use this command f
170. ection The opening screen will show If you installed the program correctly your screen should look as shown in Figure 4 1 x M Communications Setup p Interface gt Startup Options Te Specify an Address Rees Communicate Only C Previous Session Setup USB Reset Instrument amp Panels C Detect Automatically LAN Work Offline Interface Address Model List GPIB GPIBO 4 y Store mode and don t show this GE a box at startup Add Address Remove Address Cancel Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box is displayed You can check the Store and don t show so next time you invoke ArbConnection this dialog box will not be displayed The purpose of this dialog box is to update the program in the way you intend to use it For example if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4 you can click on the Specify an Address option and type in the required address so the next time you use ArbConnection the program will automatically resume communication with the same address as was originally detected If you chose to hide this dialog box you can still access and change the options from the System command at the top of the screen Make your selection and click OK The Startup amp Communication Updater dialog box will be removed from the screen And the Main panel will now be accessible But before we go into pane
171. ed a few waveforms to one The partition table then divides the memory to the individual and original size of each waveform Trigger ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels The Trigger panel as shown in Figure 4 7 is invoked by pressing the Trigger button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Trigger Panel from the Panels menu the 8102 will not change its trigger mode To modify the instrument run mode use the Main Panel The trigger parameters and setting in the Trigger Panel will have an effect on the 8102 only if an appropriate run mode setting has been selected The Trigger Panel groups allow from left to right adjustment of Trigger Modifier and their associated Trigger Parameters The functional groups in the Standard panel are described below Trigger Modifier The Trigger modifier group provides access to delayed trigger state and its delay parameter to the Re trigger state and its parameter and to the burst count for channel 1 and channel 2 To change trigger burst count for channels 1 or 2 point and click on one of these parameters The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the T HU keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading Trigger Modifier Figure 4 7 the Trigger Panel Trigger Parameters Slope The Slope group lets you select edge sen
172. em kl EA Ces ee Time Level Points NES gt 4 2 4 8 o Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo m Section Properties Design Units V ms Section Start 38 ms Repeat E Apply Duration x R 48 ms Figure 4 39 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example Pulse Example Section 5 4 60 The fourth pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the fifth and final section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 40 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new section number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier Note that there are fast transitions required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 56 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 10 x Vertical Scale 10 1 a ara A a op y H 3 MM Pulse Editor Section 5 lt DC Intervals gt m Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals EE DS wan m Section Structure Indes Le Time Cumulative DUES Interval Time 1 1 Time Level Points 25 Div Horizontal Scale 78ms 7 6ms Div OD JO OS GO PA r
173. ence Use the following procedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the arbitrary waveform function 1 Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the edit field 3 35 8101 8102 User Manual 3 36 2 Punch in the value using the numeric keypad Be careful not to exceed parameter limits while you key the numbers 3 Select and press a suffix 4 Press Enter to lock in the new value Alternately after you display the edit field you may use the dial and or the arrow keys to modify the field then press Enter to lock in the new value If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment s then the output should generate your desired waveform There are four parameters that are available for programming in this window Sample Clock Defines the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary waveform Information how to modify the sample clock is given in this chapter Amplitude Defines the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform Note that regardless of the amplitude setting the vertical resolution of which the waveform is generated is always 14 bits Offset Defines the offset value of the arbitrary waveform The offset and the amplitude can be freely programmed within a 10V window 5V to 5V rails Segment Number Defines which of the segments in the working memory is currently active at the output connector As was discussed earlier
174. ency 1 defines shifted frequency Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Below you can see how an FSK data table is constructed The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 8102 will step through this list outputting either carrier or shifted frequencies depending on the data list Zero will generate carrier frequency and One will generate shifted frequency Note that the waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample FSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt fsk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to shift from carrier to shifted frequency and visa versa PSK Modulation Use the following command for programming the PSK parameters P A The following commands will be divided into two groups PSK rogramming commands and n PSK commands The PSK function can shift from start to shifted phase setting within the range of 0 to 360 ata frequency determined by the rate value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the PSK data table The n PSK functions use pre defined table settings In case the standard table do not suit the 5 46 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands application you can design your own n PSK data using the User PSK data table entry option Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modul
175. eparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 6 for DMM reading of OV 5mV Base Line Offset Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 6V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 7 for DMM reading of OV 20mV Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation Offset Adjustments Setup 9 Setup 10 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 8 for DMM reading of OV 5mV The offs
176. epending on the present double mode setting 5 56 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands AUXiliary PULse DOUBle DELay lt d_delay gt Description This command will program the delay between two adjacent pulses when the double mode is selected Otherwise the double pulse delay has no effect on the pulse structure Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt d_delay gt Oto1e3 Numeric 2e 3 Will set the delay between two adjacent pulses for the double pulse mode in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 8102 will return the present double pulse delay value in units of seconds AUXiliary PULse HIGH lt high gt Description This command will program the interval the pulse will dwell on the high level value Although they have similar interpretation the high time and pulse width are significantly different The standard terminology of pulse width defines the width of the pulse at the mid point of its peak to peak amplitude level Therefore if you change the rise and fall time the pulse width is changing accordingly The digital pulse high time parameter defines how long the pulse will dwell on the high level so even if you change the rise and fall times the high time remains constant The pulse high time is p
177. epth of 20 To achieve this the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the fundamental or carrier The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100 cos 110 omg p and the lower sideband by the term 100 cos 90 omg p Use the following equation Ampl p 6000 sin 100 0mg p 1200 c0s 110 o0mg p 1200 cos 90 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 26 4 42 ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor ssl Equation Editor Y ul r Anchor r Waveform Amplitude i Level Adjuster Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles l Manual End pts 1023 M 32768 bh Auto Default r Equation aia ee E ES Ze Cancel A i d i st Figure 4 26 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Upper and Lower Sidebands Vertical Scale 64kPts 6kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Sec The last but not least powerful feature allows you to combine Combining waveforms which you previously stored on your hard disc You can Waveforms write mathematical expressions that contain waveforms simple operands and trigonometric functions similar to the example given below If you want to use waveforms in your equations you must first generate these waves and store them on your hard disk You identify waveforms by adding the wav extension as shown in the example below Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p
178. equency Equipment Counter Accuracy Internal Reference Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 Q DC coupled 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the counter input channel A 3 Configure the 8102 channel 1 as follows Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 6 2 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 2 Table 2 Frequency Accuracy 8102 Setting Counter Reading Pass Fail 10 000000000 Hz t0pHz 1 0000000000 kHz ompsl LI TI 100 00000000 kHz t00mHz J J 1 0000000000 MHz Hz TI 100 000000000 MHz om Frequency Equipment 10MHz reference at least 0 1ppm Counter Accuracy External Geen 10MHz Reference 1 Leave counter setting and 8102 connections as in last test 2 Connect the 10MHz reference oscillator to the 8102 rear panel input 3 Configure the 8102 channel 1 as follows 10 MHz External Waveform Squarewave Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 6 3 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 3 Table 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference 8102 Setting Counter Reading 10 000000000 MHz tHz 50 000000000 MHz pl 6 5 8101 8102 User Manual Amplitude Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the output amplifier A and attenuators Each channel has its own set of amplifiers and ccuracy attenuators and therefo
179. er button Figure 3 29 shows the screen after the Period soft key has been depressed PROGRAM ON OFF MENU P omg FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Fon oe OU T SYNC TPU een Apply DOUBLE k D Period 7 8 L J AA 00 gan m i 10 000 668ns ON yr ee um tes MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUOUS FUNC PULSE POS 0 CLOCK REF EXT Kg OR RUN CONT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF EL STE SS ey Woy Wer f A f F A 50n TTL 50n Figure 29 Programming the Pulse Period Parameter The final step before the modified pulse shape will be available at the output connector is pressing the Apply Changes soft key NOTE No change will be made on the pulse shape and at the output connector before the Apply Changes button has been pressed except when the High and Low Level buttons are exercised This was done to let the internal computing circuit do the calculation of the pulse parameters only once every time one or more parameters have been modified Adjusting the pulse shape with the required characteristics can only be done if all of its parameters can be adjusted both in the time and amplitude domain The Model 8102 provides all the necessary controls to do just that However always bear in mind that the pulse is being generated digitally and therefore there are some limitations that would have to be observed These limitations will be
180. er screen On the left bottom corner of the composer Vertical Scale is showing 10V 1 25V Div and Horizontal Scale is showing 14ms 1 4ms Div These two values are critical for the integrity of the design because they are later being interpreted by the program and converted to waveform coordinates that the generator can process and output as a pulse shape These values may change as you add more sections to the pulse train 10 x D chase Ser Furan Se Zou op MM Pulse Editor Section 2 lt Points gt m Section Structure SC Time Cumulative evel Interval Time 1 0 D D 2 4 4 0 0 i Pulse Train Design Format CH DC Intervals Time Level Points m Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 14 ms Repeat E j Piro t E S ma Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 23ms 2 3ms Div Figure 4 37 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example 4 57 8101 8102 User Manual Pulse Example Section 2 Pulse Example Section 3 4 58 The first pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the second section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 37 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new section number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section not
181. erences to the second channel in this manual Model 8102 is a dual channel Function Arbitrary Generator It is a high performance waveform generator that combines two separate and powerful channels in one small package Supplied free with the instrument is ArbConnection software utility which is used for controlling the 8102 and for generating editing and downloading waveforms from a remote computer The following highlights the 8102 and ArbConnection features Dual output configuration with Independent waveform control Tight phase offset control between channels 1 point resolution 16 bit vertical resolution Generates signals up to 32 Vp p into high impedance load 512k memory depth for each channel 250 MS s sample clock frequency 100 MHz output bandwidth 1 ppm clock stability Extremely low phase noise carrier FM AM FSK PSK and sweep Built in standard waveforms Remote calibration without removing case covers Auxiliary pulse generator GPIB USB and Ethernet interfaces 8101 8102 User Manual 1 4 MENU a 000909 3 eme FUNCTION ARSITRARY GENERATOR 150102 TYPE BIT SLOPE POS LEVEL 1 404 POS 1000000 SOUR INT TIME 10005 cnt cuz bus sync OCDE CG CC OO E 0 a Be MAN TRIG CG 0 vi MENU LOCAL bg _ _ _ nn ArbConnection Feature Highlights Figure 1 1 Model 8102 Three powerful tools in one software package Complete instrument control Waveform and pulse com
182. erfaced to the instrument Calibration is performed from the Calibration Panel in AroConnection To invoke this panel one requires a password that is available to service centers only Contact your nearest Tabor service center for information and permit to obtain your calibration password Use the following procedure to calibrate the generator 1 Invoke ArbConnection 2 Click on the UTIL icon on the Panels bar 3 On the Utility Panel click on Calibration and expect to be prompted with the following dialog box Adjustments and Firmware Update Adjustment Procedures Enter Password Figure 7 1 Calibration Password 4 Type your User Name Password and click on OK The Calibration Panel as shown in Figure 7 2 will appear Amplitude Figure 7 2 Calibration Panel ei NOTE Initial factory adjustments require that the covers be removed from the instrument Field calibration does not require re adjustments of these factory settings unless the unit was repaired in an authorized service center Factory adjustments are enclosed in parentheses to differentiate from normal field calibration setups bypass these adjustments when performing field calibration 7 5 8101 8102 User Manual Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 6 Calibrations are marked with numbers from 1 to 50 and except the 50M and 10M adjustments in the Selection group should be carried out exactly in the order as numbered on the panel There are separate
183. eries as device dependent commands For example TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument Some common commands and queries are optional but most of them are mandatory The following is a complete listing of all common commands and queries which are used by the 8102 CLS Clear the Status Byte summary register and all event registers ESE lt enable value gt Enable bits in the Standard Event enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte ESE Query the Standard Event enable register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESR Query the Standard Event register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register IDN Query the generator s identity The returned data is organized into four fields separated by commas The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four If the latter information is not available the device must return an ASCII 0 for each For example Model 8102 response to IDN is Tabor 8102 0 1 0 OPC Set the operation complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed OPC Returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed
184. erify FM waveforms as selected Test Results Pass Fail 3 Move 8102 marker position to 1 25MHz and verify marker position Test Results Pass Fail 4 Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 5 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail Triggered FM Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Standard Waveforms preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows 8101 8102 User Manual Frequency Run Mode Waveform Amplitude Offset 1 kHz Continuous Squarewave 2V 1V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulation Mod Run Mode Carrier Freq Mod Frequency Deviation Sync Output Test Procedure Modulated FM Triggered 1 MHz 10 kHz 500 kHz On On 1 Verify triggered FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Triggered sine wa
185. es from the built in Library The Toolbar Dear lt 4 32 The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 19 For the individual icons refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus H Kn H NM 4 SMA OR me al wi kel a lor Be Figure 4 19 the Toolbar Icons The Waveform Screen L Anchor 0 Vi Equation Editor x ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen Figure 4 20 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform between points 100 and 900 The various elements of the waveform screen are described below The waveform screen has two axes vertical and horizontal Both axes are divided into points The vertical axis is labeled from 32767 through 32768 for a total of 16 384 point This number represents 14 bits of vertical resolution and cannot be changed because it is critical to the range of which the 8102 operates The horizontal axis by default has 1024 points from point O to 1023 This number can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar The maximum length depends on the option installed in your instrument The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maxi
186. es the offset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Using the The 8102 besides its standard waveform generation functions has Auxiliary an additional auxiliary function that can transform the instrument to E stand alone full featured Digital Pulse Generator Detailed Functions operating instructions for the auxiliary function are given in the following paragraphs Ni The digital pulse generator function provides means of designing Using the Digital pulses and their associated parameters in units of time exactly as Pulse Generator would be done on a stand alone bench type analog pulse generator Note however that the pulse is built in the same memory as the arbitrary waveforms are being stored and therefore changing from arbitrary to digital pulse modes and reverse may overwrite waveforms that were downloaded to the memory Use the instructions below to access and program the pulse menus 1 Press TOP to display the root menu 2 Press the arrow down key once and observe that the Auxiliary Functions menu appears 3 Press Auxiliary Functions soft key and notice that the Pulse Generator option is highlighted as shown in Figure 3 27 4 Press the Enter button to select the digital pulse generator function Figure 3 28 shows the Pulse Generator panel and menus 3 47 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 223 oe FUNCTION ARS
187. esets the DC amplitude parameter to its original factory default Noise Wave The noise waveform is useful in applications requiring generation of simple noise The spectral spread of the noise is pseudo random and is limited in its bandwidth by the bandwidth parameter The noise parameters are re computed every time a parameter is changed 1000 points are allocated for the noise shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The noise waveform is reasonable up to about 2 5MHz where 100 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the shape of the noise is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to noise waveform parameters These are Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter
188. et adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue Offset 1V Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 2V Ch1 Offset 1V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 61 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV Offset 3V Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate 7 11 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 11 Setup 12 the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 2V Ch1 Offset 3V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 60 for DMM reading of 3V 15mV 5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 outpu
189. evel Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new amplitude and offset boundaries If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation The same way you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset If you check the Manual option you ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again If you check the Auto option your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting 4 35 8101 8102 User Manual Writing Equations 4 36 Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field You will be using the Equation field for writing your equations Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation Click on the Store button to store your equation if you intend to use it again The Browse button provides access to waveform pre
190. fferent start phase Type this Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 23 4 39 8101 8102 User Manual 4 40 EM am Files Equation Editor a About Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles C Manual SS End pts 1023 Min 32768 bh Auto Defaut Equation T S Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cancel fi Zeer anions a al e OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 23 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms In the following example as shown in Figure 4 24 20 second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave The original waveform had a peak to peak value of 24000 points so 19 second harmonic is equivalent to 4500 points The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental so term 4500 sin 2 omg p is added to the original sine wave equation Use the following equation Amplitude p 24000 sin omg p 4500 sine 2 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 24 ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor SE gt SE Anchor gt Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster EN LX SS z D Saa Xx XL Start pts fo Max 22767 Cycles Manual Original 1 SZ Z om op End pts 1
191. ffset between channels when the 8102 is programmed to generate arbitrary or sequenced waveforms is simpler because you already know how many waveform points you used for generating your waveform and what is the programmed sample clock and therefore as discussed before the delay is computed from the following relationship Offset Channel 2 n x 1 sclk Or if you prefer to use phase offset in degrees compute your phase offset resolution from the following relationship Phase Offset Resolution 360 n where n wave points And then multiply n by the value you program in the CH2 gt CH1 field Navigate to the Outputs menu as shown in figure 3 69 and modify the Offset Channel 2 field as required Modulated waveforms are generated by the DDS circuit and therefore the phase offset between channels cannot be modified because the DDS generates sine waveform only and does not depend on waveform memory for the shape of the waveform Using the modulated waveforms there is a constant phase offset between the channels this phase offset is always 90 The constant phase offset for the modulated waveform is especially valuable for generating amp Q vectors There are two parameters that could be customized for easier fit of the output parameters These are the Horizontal Units the Load Impedance Dial Direction Clock Source and Display Brightness Figure 3 34 shows the customization panel Navigate to the customization display from
192. figure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2 Offset 7V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 73for DMM reading of 7V 35mV Setup 17 Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2Offset 1V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP16 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV Note reading 7 35 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 18 Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Q Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch2 Amplitude 20mV Ch2Offset 1V Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP16 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV note reading 5 Repeat Setup 17 and Setup 18 until errors are balanced between the steps Amplitude The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the 1p specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude Adjustments accuracy is an issue Setup 19 10V
193. follows Mode Modulation Ch1 Amplitude 510mV Adjustment 4 Note DMM reading Setup 4 Base Line Offset High Range Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation Chi Amplitude 1 590V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 6 for DMM reading the same as Setup 3 5 Repeat Setup 3 and Setup 4 until the DMM readings are the same 10mV 6 Adjust RV1 for DMM readings of 0V 10mV Setup 5 Base Line Offset Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Mode Modulation 7 9 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 6 Setup 7 Setup 8 7 10 Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 6V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP 5 for DMM reading of OV 20mV Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Pr
194. forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string A value for the frequency parameter such as FREQ 50e 6 must be specified Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string TRIG SLOP NEG COUN 10 TIM 5e 3 is the same as sending the following three commands TRIG SLOP NEG TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 5e 3 Use the colon and semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if both the colon and the semicolon are not used OUTP STATE ON TRIG BURS ON The MIN and MAX Parameters Querying Parameter Setting Query Response Format SCPI Command Terminator IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands Remote Programming Reference Introduction to SCPI Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some commands For example consider the following co
195. from channel 1 or channel 2 Front panel controls and keys are grouped in logical order to provide efficient and quick access to instrument functions and parameters Refer to Figure 1 5 throughout the following description to learn the purpose and effect of each front panel control 1 9 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ONJOFF Marty SAIN 100MHz FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 135102 Con cH2 fourut sync BASE H 40DE TRIGGER E SYNC FUNC STD TYPE BIT SLOPE POS LEVEL 1 40 RUN CONT POS 1000000 SOUR INT TIME 10005 Figure 1 5 8102 Front Panel Controls lay Note The index in the following paragraphs point to the numbered arrows in Figure 1 5 1 Power Switch Toggles 8102 power ON and OFF 2 Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing 3 Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing 4 Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing 5 Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 8102 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons 6 Enter Man Trig Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters a
196. from equations and tables that are built into the program The instrument can output arbitrary waveforms however only after waveform data has been downloaded into its memory Refer to Figure 3 4 and use the following procedure to select an output type Note that there are sub menus associated with each output type menu Accessing and using these sub menus is described later in this chapter The numbers on Figure 3 4 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description PROGRAM ON OFF ke FEF 1 00M FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Fon oe fourpur sync BASE MODE FUNC STD RUN TRIG KEKEKE lun land CHIC Ko comm ke MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG TRIGGERED EXT sy OUT POS LEVEL 1 60U o eme o eme o SLOPE POSITIVE EL SE Ez ty Wey WAN f A f f A 50n Tu 50n Figure 3 4 Selecting an Output Waveform Type Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 1 Press TOP to display the root menu 2 Press Waveforms the display as shown in Figure 3 4 will open 3 Press one of the soft keys to select the required waveform Note the waveform screen shows a sine waveform The sine is the default waveform After you select a different waveform type the screen will be updated with a new symbol which is associated with the new type 3 Note The picture in the
197. fset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another The Offset parameter as programmed in this menu is shared by all other waveform options Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms ENEE SOR INT ee A 1 000 000 06MHz BASE MODE SYNE OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS o CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION OFF Figure 17 Modulation OFF Parameters The AM function enables amplitude modulation of a carrier waveform CW The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform normally referred to as envelop waveform The envelop waveform can be selected from sine triangle square or ramp shapes When AM is selected the menus that are associated with AM will be accessible These are shown in Figure 3 18 There are other parameters that control how the CW is amplitude modulated these are Modulation Shape defines the envelop function There are four shapes that can be used Sine Triangle Square and Ramp The Modulation Shape menu that provides access to the selection of the envelop waveform is shown in Figure 3 19 Modulation depth programmed in units of and defines the depth of the modulating envelop Modulation depth is programmed from 0 to 100 Modulation Frequency defines the frequency of the modulating waveform The modulating waveform is programmed from 10mHz to 100kHz
198. gate the 8102 for programming errors Response The 8102 will return error code Error messages are listed later in this manual 5 61 8101 8102 User Manual SYSTem LOCal Description This command will deactivate the active interface and will restore the 8102 to local front panel operation SYSTem VERSion Description Query only This query will interrogate the 8102 for its current firmware version The firmware version is automatically programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user except when performing firmware update Response The 8102 will return the current firmware version code in a format similar to the following 1 35 SYSTem INFormation CALibration Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its last calibration date Response The generator will return the last calibration date in a format similar to the following 24 Oct 2006 10 characters maximum SYSTem INFormation MODel Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its model number in a format similar to the following 8102 The model number is programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator will return its model number either 8101 or 8102 SYSTem INFormation SERial Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its serial number The serial number is programmed to a
199. gmentation Minimum Segment Size Number of Memory Segments Waveform Segments size and resolution Custom Waveform Creation Software lt 5 ns 1 mV to 16 Vp p lt 5 100 ps The 8102 has a special mode where the instrument type is transformed to operate as a digital pulse generator When this mode is selected the operation of the arbitrary waveform and its outputs are disabled and possibly arbitrary waveforms are overwritten 1 All pulse parameters except rise and fall times may be freely programmed within the selected pulse period provided that the ratio between the period and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 512 000 to 1 2 Rise and fall times may be freely programmed provided that the ratio between the rise fall time and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 100 000 to 1 3 The sum of all pulse parameters must not exceed the pulse period setting Both channels share pulse parameters except level polarity delay and state On or Off On generates pulse output Off generates 0 Vdc Single or double programmable Normal inverted or complemented 80 ns minimum programmed with 16 ns increments O ns min 2e3 s max 0 ns minimum 2e3 s max 0 ns minimum 2e3 s max actual min lt 5 ns 0 ns minimum 10 mVp p to 16 Vp p 8 V to 7 983 V 7 983 V to 8 V 16 bits Permits division of waveform memory into smaller segments 16 points 1 to 10k 4 points size incremen
200. gn the proper subnet mask and gateway IP For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network you can choose your own IP addresses The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device If your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same If your subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 only the first two numbers in the IP addresses on the network must match For either subnet mask numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address but this number must be the same as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Table 2 1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255 255 255 0 All valid IP addresses contain the same first three numbers The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only If you are setting up your own network you probably do not have a gateway so you should set these values to 0 0 0 0 Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Comment 123 234 45 213 Valid The first three numbers match the previous IP address The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254 123
201. grammed as percent of the ramp period Note that the sum of the delay rise and fall times cannot exceed 100 If the sum is less than 100 the end of the ramp will remain at a dc level to the completion of the period Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters Resets the ramp wave parameters to their original factory defaults Pulse Wave The pulse waveform is a very common waveform and is need for the majority of the applications however not being a true pulse generator the pulse parameters are computed and programmed as percent of the pulse period The waveform is computed every time a parameter is modified 1000 points are allocated for the pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the resolution of the parameters is lost to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to pulse waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the pulse waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefo
202. grammed just as they would be programmed on a dedicated pulse generator instrument Just bear in mind that since this is a digital instrument there are some limitations to the pulse design that evolve from the fact that the best resolution is one sample clock interval and also keep in mind that the pulse is created digitally in the arbitrary memory and therefore its smallest incremental step has a maximum value limitation as specified in Appendix A AUXiliary PULse DELay lt delay gt Description This command will program the delayed interval of which the output idles on the low level amplitude until the first transition to high level amplitude Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0to10 Numeric 0 Will set the delay time interval in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first and then all other pulse parameters Response The 8102 will return the pulse delay value in units of seconds AUXiliary PULse DOUBle OFF ON 0 1K Description This command will turn the double pulse mode on and off The double pulse mode duplicates the first pulse parameters at a delayed interval set by the double pulse delay value Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the double pulse mode on and off Response The 8102 will return 0 or 1 d
203. gure 4 8a These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective run modes and parameters The modulation functions that are available on these panels are FM frequency modulation AM amplitude modulation Sweep FSK frequency shift keying and PSK phase shift keying All modulation functions are programmed simultaneously for both channels except AM where each channel can be programmed separately with a different set of parameters When modulation run other than continuous is selected there are two options that control the idle state between triggers 1 Carrier baseline and 2 DC baseline When the first option is selected the instrument generates non modulated carrier frequency CW until a valid stimuli signal is applied and when the second option is selected the instrument generates a dc level signal until a stimulated to generate a modulation cycle The modulation options their associated parameters and the various run mode options are described separately for each of the panels The Modulation Group is common to all modulation panels It contains an array of buttons that select the appropriate modulation scheme It also provides access to the CW Carrier Waveform frequency setting The CW frequency parameter is common to all of the modulation functions FM Freq Hz Modulation ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels The FM group contains parameters for controlling the frequency modulation function
204. h aAa dadas A 1 viii List of Tables Chapter Title Page 1 1 Run Modes and Trigger Source Options Summary occccccccccnncoooonccnoncconanananononononnnnnnnnnencnnnin 1 15 1 2 Trigger Source Options Summary ENNEN 1 16 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 oo ccccccccseecceeseseeeeeeseeaeaees 2 17 3 1 Default Conditions After Heesei 3 5 3 2 Front Panel Waveform Menus oooccccccccnnccncnononcnonononcnnnnonononnnonnnincnnnnonnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnnnrncnnnanenenns 3 8 3 3 Front Panel Run Mode Menus ccccccceeececceeeeeeeeceeeeeeceecenceeeeeeaeaceeeeeegeeeeteaeneeeteaeneeeeees 3 9 3 4 Front Panel Utility and Output Menus cece cece eee eeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeeee 3 10 3 5 Front Panel Auxiliary Menus 0ovcoo cos Aia 3 10 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary coooocooccccccncccnonananancnonnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnn ocn ccnnnin 5 8 5 2 Instrument Control Commands Summary EEN 5 14 5 3 Instrument Control Commands Summary ccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononeneneneninnnnnnnannos 5 21 5 4 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary ccccooococcccccnncccnnnonnnnnnncnonannnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnn 5 29 5 5 Modulated Waveforms Commande osoessnsesrrnnesrrrneserrrrrrrrrrrerrrresrrrnrresrrrrtesrrrresrrrrrerrrree 5 35 5 6 Rum Mode CoOMmMandS indias 5 50 5 7 Auxiliary GOMMANGS sevi nea 5 55 5 8 System Commands Gummanm ENEE 5 61 6 1 Recommended Test EQUIPME se
205. h the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly 8 Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys 9 Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value 10 Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation 11 Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode 12 ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and OFF The 8102 has over 300 parameters that control functions modes waveforms and auxiliary functions Due to the complexity of the product the functions were divided to logical groups and sub groups and access to these groups is provided using the soft key menus There are five main menus of which can be accessed after pressing the TOP soft key These are shown in Figure 3 1 and are mark as item 3 A B C and D The main menus are Waveform Run Mode Utility Outputs and Auxiliary
206. hapter however you must install AroConnection before you can use it The next paragraphs describe installation and first steps before going into in depth operation The installation program installs AroConnection on a logical drive of your choice The default is drive C It automatically creates a new directory and copies the files that are required to run the program Before you install AroConnection make sure that there is at least 50 megabytes of available memory on your hard disk drive To install AroConnection insert the distribution disk in the A drive Invoke Run and type A Setup The install program does the complete job far you and creates a workgroup and icons to start AroConnection 4 3 8101 8102 User Manual Quitting ArbConnection For the New and Advanced Users Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 Before you start roaming through menus and editing commands we strongly recommend that you make yourself familiar with ArbConnection basics and concept For now quit the program and spend some more time with this section of the manual Point the mouse cursor to the File menu and press the left mouse button Move the mouse cursor to the Exit command and press the left mouse button For the New User Learning to use ArbConnection is easy intuitive and quick even if you have never used such programs before After you have installed ArbConnection on your computer read the following paragraphs to learn how
207. hat are applied to the instrument from any interface LAN USB or GPIB Description of the various trigger source options is given in the following paragraphs The trigger signal whether it comes from an external source or from an interface command is routed through some electrical circuits These circuits cause some small delay known as system delay System delay cannot be eliminated completely The system delay is a factor that must be considered when applying a trigger signal It defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger edge or software Burst Gated Delayed Trigger Re Trigger Getting Started 1 Delayed Trigger command to the instant that the output reacts Note that there is different behavior of the output in triggered mode for standard arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency the other waveforms idle on dc level only The burst mode is an extension of the triggered mode where the Model 8102 can be programmed to output a pre determined number of waveforms Note that there is different behavior of the output in burst mode for standard and arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency the other waveforms idle on dc level only In gated mode the 8102 gener
208. he Instrument Selecting a Remote interface i Found New Hardware x TABOR W58102 USB Waveform Generator Figure 2 3 USB Device Detected Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for TABOR 58102 USB Waveform Generator If your hardware came with an installation CD 42 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue Figure 2 4 Found New Hardware Wizard Immediately thereafter the Found New Hardware Wizard will open as shown in Figure 2 4 Select the Install from a list or specific Location option and click on next At this time insert the installation CD into your CD driver If you know the logical letter for your CD drive type in the information in the path field If you are not sure where this driver is click on the Browse button and look for the path Check the appropriate controls as shown in Figure 2 5 and then click on Next With Service Pack 2 only you ll be prompted with a Windows Logo Warning message as shown in figure 2 6 advising you that the software has not been verified for its compatibility with Windows XP Click on Continue Anyway To complete the process press on Finish as shown in Figure 2 7 2 9 8101 8102 User Manual Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver
209. he LAN 10 100 screen as shown in Figure 2 13 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The LAN 10 100 soft key will update the display with the LAN parameters Note there are some parameters that are shown on the display that cannot be accessed or modified These are Physical Address and Host Name These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for product The only parameters that can be modified are the IP MENU a 60880 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface Address the Subnet mask and the Default gateway Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN network Description of the LAN settings and information how to change them is given in the following B Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu Information how to select and Interface is given herinbefore ke E 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 A TCP IP Network Properties Physical Address 00 13 76 00 00 00 Host Name WW2572A PROT DHCP Enabled s IP Address 192 168 0 245 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 LAN Check with your network administrator 10 100 before choosing an IP address to avoid conflicts wi
210. hesis technology the Model 8102 is extremely frequency agile Changing the sample clock frequency is as easy as changing bits at the DDS control The DDS has an extremely wide dynamic range with excellent linearity throughout the complete range The properties of the DDS are passed on directly to the output therefore the frequency is modulated within an extremely wide band without loosing linearity For example the 8102 can sweep linearly from minimum to its maximum frequency whereas similar instruments that use the standard VCO design can sweep through 3 decades only The 8102 can produce Sweep FSK PSK ASK AM and FM When modulation is used from one channel the other channel is 90 phase shifted specifically convenient for applications such as amp Q modulation Modulated waveforms are selected from the waveforms menu Figure 3 17 shows how to select the FM To access this menu press TOP then waveforms and select the Modulated waveforms option Modulation type is selected from the Modulation Type menu Refer to Figure 3 17 and use the following procedure to select the modulation type 1 Press on the Modulation Type soft key The following options will display Off AM FM FSK PSK and Sweep 2 Using the dial or the up and down arrow keypad scroll down to the desired option 3 Press Enter to lock in the selected modulation type The output will be updated immediately after you press the Enter button 3 37 8101 8
211. his section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM PERFORMANCE TESTS IN A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION The following performance checks verify proper operation of the instrument and should normally be used 1 As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications 2 As part of the troubleshooting procedure 3 After any repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 8102 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure 6 3 8101 8102 User Manual Initial Instrument Setting Recommended Test Equipment To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test
212. i x EZ S Z on ow ioio Fai Train D ha K Pulse Train Design Format iz Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 40 ms Repeat gt j2 Duration x A 35 2ms ar DO OD d ORFs WN rs Figure 4 28 the Pulse Composer Screen The File command has 4 command lines that control pulse waveform files Also use this command to print the active waveform or exit the pulse composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New The New Ctrl N command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open The Open Ctrl O command will let you browse through your disk space for previously saved pulse waveform files and load them to the pulse screen area File extension that can be read to the pulse composer is pls Save The Save Ctrl S command will store the active waveform in your 8102 directory with a pls extension If this is the first time you save ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor your waveform the Save As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save As Use the Save As command the first time you sav
213. ic format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned PSK DATA lt psk_data gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 8102 to hop from phase to phase Data format is a string of 0 and 1 which define when the output generates the various phases The size of the data word depends on the PSK function For PSK and BPSK there are only two bits 0 defines start phase 1 defines shifted phase 16PSK has 4 bits of which 0000 defines the first phase vector 0001 defines the second 0000 the third and 1111 defines the 16th phase vector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the PSK data list Below you can see how an PSK data table and a 16PSK data table are constructed The PSK data table sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 8102 will step through this list outputting either start or shifted phases depending on the data list Zero will generate start phase and One will generate shifted phase Note that the output waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed The 16PSK data array has 10 shifts as well except this time the shifts are a bit more complex Sample PSK Data Array 0111010001 Sample 16PSK Data Array 0000 0100 1010 0111 1111 0001 0010 0111 0101 1111 Parameters Name Type Description lt psk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to step from one phase setti
214. idas 3 17 3 9 Trigger Run Mode NEE 3 19 3 10 Gated Mode Parameter 3 21 3 11 Burst Run Mode Parametere 3 22 3 12 SYNC and Filter Parametere 3 23 3 13 Built in Standard Waveforms Menu 3 25 3 14 the Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ooooooooccccnnnnnnccconcccnnncccnannnns 3 34 3 15 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters AA 3 37 3 16 Selecting a modulated Wave Mision ata lira 3 38 3 17 Modulation OFF ParameterS cccccccccsseecccceeeseeeeeeenceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseeetnaegs 3 39 32118 AM NUS caigo 3 40 3 19 Modulating Waveform Shapes cocooonmoonccccnnononononcccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rn nn nene nnnnnn rr rre nenas 3 40 3 20 FM Modulation Parametere 3 42 3 21 Modulation Waveform Shapes kk 3 42 3 22 FSK Control Data String Example Abee 3 43 3 23 En UE 3 44 3 24 PSK Control Data String Example Abee 3 45 3 25 PSK Me DIE uti a Ee REENEN 3 45 3 26 SwWeep EEN 3 46 xii 8101 8102 User Manual 3 27 Accessing the Pulse Generator Menus ooocooconocooooonccononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 3 48 3 28 the Digital Pulse Generator Menus kee 3 48 3 29 Programming the Pulse Period Parameter 3 49 3 30 Double Pulse Mode ros 3 51 3 31 Programming Phase Offset Between Channel 3 55 3 32 Changing the Start Phase on the Sine Waveform oooooocococcccccnccccnnnnanoncncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnns 3 55 3 33 Customizing the Output Parameter
215. ignal transition to above the trigger level will gate the instrument When the slope is set to negative transitions to below the trigger level will gate the instrument Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input You may use the gated mode to gate standard arbitrary and modulated waveforms The gated run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 10 Using the Instrument Selecting the Modulation Run Modes Gate Parameters Source 54 Triggered Slope Positive Triggered Level 1 60 Gated BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC STD POS 6 RUN GATE SRC CH Figure 10 Gated Mode Parameters Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode with the exception that only Burst Mode one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output waveforms In Burst mode the output remains at a DC level as long as a valid trigger signal has not occurred Each time a trigger occurs the 8102 generates a counted number of burst of waveforms At the end of the output burst the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform The instrument may be triggered from one of the following sources A rear panel input designated as TRIG IN front panel button marked MAN TRIG and a remote command such as TRG When placed in EXT external trigger source remote commands are ignored and the instrument monitors the TRIG IN connector or the MAN TRIG c
216. ignates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 4 The generator accepts binary data as 32 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always 4 times the number of segments For example 36 bytes are required to download 9 segments to the segment table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data The segment table data is made of 32 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 32 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 8102 as segment table data Figure 5 4 shows how to prepare the 32 bit work for the segment start address and size There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 32 19 15 7 D sz x LIT tone TRUNCATE Figure 5 4 Segment Address and Size Example 5 33 8101 8102 User Manual 1 Each channel has its own segment table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct a
217. igure 2 12 B Note Configuring your USB setting does not automatically select the USB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu Information how to select and Interface is given hereinbefore 2 13 8101 8102 User Manual E Device Manager File Action Yiew Help Aen SS 3 TESTING LAPTOP ER e Batteries Computer 99 Disk drives EI Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives H E Floppy disk controllers 43 Human Interface Devices IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 1 9 IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers 2a Keyboards E Ve Mice and other pointing devices k gt Modems 2 Monitors 88 Network adapters a PCMCIA adapters Ports COM 8 LPT SBR Processors EI Sound video and game controllers A System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Intel R 82801CA CAM USB Universal Host Controller 2482 Intel R 82801CA CAM USB Universal Host Controller 2484 TABOR VW58102 USB Waveform Generator USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Figure 2 12 Model 8102 Configured for USB Operation LAN Configuration 2 14 There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish network communications using the LAN interface Primarily you ll need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface To change LAN configuration you need to access t
218. iliary Functions Digital Pulse Generator Getting Started 1 Modulation Run Modes In Phase Shift Keying PSK the output of the 8102 hops between two phase settings start and shifted phase while the frequency of the carrier waveform remain the same Note that CW is sinewave only Sweep modulation allows carrier waveform CW to sweep from one frequency defined by the sweep start parameter to another frequency defined by the sweep stop parameter Note that CW is sinewave only The start and stop frequencies can be programmed throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument Run modes are shared by all waveforms that are generated by the 8102 including modulation However when in modulation function run mode options take different meaning When in triggered burst or gated run modes the 8102 outputs sine carrier waveform CW until a valid trigger is received and then reacts to the trigger If triggers cease to stimulate the input the output resumes generating CW frequency only Carrier frequency is common to all modulation functions and can be programmed from the modulation menus If the above behavior is not desired the 8102 can be programmed to output dc level when idle generate the modulated signal when triggered and then resume dc level position when the modulation cycle has ended The baseline option is programmable from either the front panel or from remote The 8102 besides its standard waveform generation func
219. in outputs and the sate of the SYNC output Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off From this group you also control the position of the SYNC pulse and the source of the sync If you select the SYNC source to come from channel 1 the waveform that is generated at the CH1 output connector will be synchronized with the rising edge of the SYNC output pulse Selecting the SYNC source as CH2 transfers the synchronization to the second channel Note that you ll notice the difference only if you have different waveforms and waveform length in channels 1 and 2 The load impedance buttons allow you to adjust the display amplitude reading to your actual load impedance value The default value is 50 ohms and the output range is calculated in reference to this value If your actual load impedance is higher than 50 ohms and you increase the load impedance value in this group the output of the 8102 will display the correct value as is measured on your load impedance The Standard Panel as shown in Figure 4 4 is accessible after you click on the Standard button in the Panels bar The Standard Waveform Panel groups allow from left to right adjustment of CH1 and CH2 waveforms and their associated parameters The functional groups in the Standard panel are described below Parameters Figure 4 4 the Standard Waveforms Panel ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels CH 1 and CH 2 Waveforms The Waveforms group provides access to a li
220. in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search d drivers usb O Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware The software you are installing for this hardware TABOR VS8102 USB Waveform Generator has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows lt P Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing A STOP Installation Figure 2 6 Windows Logo Warning Message 2 10 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for E TABOR Y58102 USB Waveform Generator Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 7 New Hardware Found and Software installed Figure 2 7 shows that the Tabor 8102 USB Waveform
221. ing Phase Offset Between Channels Contrary to what was discussed in the above there are two waveforms that behave differently these are sine and triangular waveforms You can still use the phase offset method as was described in the above however the two functions are different in a way that you can change the start phase on each waveform in increments of 0 2 regardless of how many waveform points are being used for generating the shape This is true even if the number of waveform points do not allow such resolution however it is also limited to 50MHz maximum The phase offset for sine and triangle are changed from the Standard Sine and Standard Triangle menus and not from the Outputs menu When you change start phase on one channel you automatically generate a phase offset between the two channels provided that both channels generate the same waveform shape The phase adjustment for the sine and triangle waveforms is accessed from the Waveform gt Standard gt Phase menu as shown in figure 3 32 Wave Shape o Phase Reset Parameters BASE MODE SYN CONTINUOUS FUNC STO POS CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 PATTERN OFF Figure 32 Changing the Start Phase on the Sine Waveform 3 55 8101 8102 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary Waveforms Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated Waveforms Customizing the Output Units Selecting the Horizontal Units 3 56 The method of setting phase o
222. ing Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Vertical Scale 10 1 254 Diy Horizontal Scale 38ms 3 8ms Div Current Il om d View ku Train D I 11 y Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals nc Time Level Points ag Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo m Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 23 ms Repeat 5 Apply Duration x DI 15 ms Figure 4 38 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example Pulse Example Section 4 The third pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the forth section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 39 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new section number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there is only one linear transition required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 4 59 8101 8102 User Manual 101 x Vertical Scale 10 1 25 V Div Horizontal Scale 42 8ms 4 28ms1 dk Ful Train y Sa To CH i r Pulse Train Design Format Time Cumulative
223. ing the Download Summary 4 62 It is very important for you to understand that when you download a pulse waveform from the pulse composer parameters and mode of operation may change settings on your generator The download summary shows what will change and will let you reject the new settings if you do not agree to the changes Once you press the Accept button the waveform will be downloaded to the generator and the modes and parameters updated as shown in the dialog box If you are already familiar with the changes and do not care to see the download summary every time you download a pulse waveform you can check the box and it will not be shown on your next download You can restore this summary from the View gt gt Download Summary command Mode of Operation This describes the new setting of the operating mode This field could display one of two options Arbitrary Pay attention to the note that says Select from the menu View gt gt Options Since we checked the Force Pulse Train to Single Segment see Figure 4 50 the generator determines that the waveform mode be arbitrary and only one segment can be loaded with the pulse train Memory management By selecting the arbitrary mode of operation the pulse train is forced to a single segment This summary shows which segment has been populated and how much memory was used to build the required pulse train Instrument Settings Show the amplitude offset and sample cl
224. input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 10 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP50 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV 100mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 11 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP51 for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV 50mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 12 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP52 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 35 1V Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Du
225. ins of pulse waveforms you can always Using the Instrument 3 Pulse Design Limitations do it using the Pulse Composer in ArbConnection The pulse composer allows creation of complex pulse trains without limiting amplitude shape and number of pulses in one pulse train 4 Inter channel parameter dependency As explained in 1 above the pulse is created digitally using a sample clock generator that clocks memory points The 8102 has only one sample clock generator and therefore most of the pulse parameters that are associated with time interval are shared across the channels When designing a pulse on one channel bear in mind that some parameters will be exactly the same on the other channel These are Period rise high and fall times double state and double state delay The rest of the parameters are not inter channel dependent and can be designed within the limitation of the pulse generator as specified in Appendix A The 8102 has two output channels that can generate various and Understanding the numerous waveforms Although the control over waveform Basics of Phase parameters is separate for each channel the sample clock is Offset between derived from a single source Having a single source for both Channels channels is of great advantage because of two main reasons 1 There is no jitter between the two channels and 2 If we ignore the initial skew both waveforms start at exactly the same phase Understanding the initial
226. int as an average of symmetrical number of adjacent points When you select the Filter command a dialog box pops up letting you program the filter spacing in number of adjacent points You can filter the entire waveform or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment Invert The Invert command lets you invert the entire waveforms or marked segments of waveforms The waveform is inverted about the 0 point axis Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its original left position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor point becomes the first point of the waveform Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the right anchor was not moved from its original right position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor point becomes the last point of the waveform Unmark The unmark command removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point O and the last waveform point Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation 4 29 8101 8102 User Manual View Commands File Edit View Wave Download About DG RH E a eg a of 4 a E Ba 4 Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 2 j F om oe
227. ion THD Harmonics and Spurious at less than 1 Vp p Flatness 1 Vp p 1MHz ref Appendices Specifications 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns 5 of setting 200 ns to 20s 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns 5 of setting 1 sample clock period 1 Hz to 100 MHz 1 y Hz to 12 5 MHz 11 digits Same as frequency standard 0 360 0 0 1 0 360 0 0 1 0 to 99 9 0 99 99 of period each independently 0 99 9 of period each independently 10 200 4 100 100 to 100 8 V to 8 V Sine wave is created in two different circuits 1 Computed using the standard sine waveform function and 2 Generated from the DDS direct digital synthesis circuit as CW carrier wave for the modulation functions CW is available when the 8102 is set to Modulation OFF Performance in the following will refer to either STD sinewave or CW above case 1 and 2 respectively 0 1 to 100 kHz STD and CW lt 45dBc lt 100 MHz lt 50dBc lt 50 MHz lt 55dBc lt 25 MHz lt 60dBc lt 5 MHz lt 1dB to 50 MHz lt 2dB to 100 MHz 8101 8102 User Manual Square Wave Pulse Performance Rise Fall Time 10 90 Aberration typical Jitter rms Pulse Generator Waveforms Operation Programmability Channel Dependency Pulse State Pulse Mode Polarity Period Delay Double Pulse Delay Rise Fall Times High Time Amplitude Window Low Level High Level Arbitrary Waveforms Vertical Resolution Waveform Se
228. ion and period The pulse is being created digitally using a sample clock generator that clocks memory points The rate of the sample clock defines the incremental resolution Consider that you want to generate 100 ms pulse rates with 1 ms high time pulse and the rest of the period low In this case the generator can select the 1 kS s to 10 kS s clock rate because this is enough for generating a high signal of 1 ms using just 100 to 1000 memory points However when you want to define much smaller pulse widths at larger rep rates the number of points that are used for the generation increases as a function of the period The limitation is set by the number of memory points with the basic model 8102 the incremental resolution is 1 in 512k 2 Sum of pulse parameters cannot exceed the period While designing a pulse shape bear in mind that the generator will detect automatically if you are trying to mess with the mathematics Therefore remember the sum of all parameters cannot exceed the period Always start your pulse design by assigning the correct pulse period and only then work your way down the parameters list 3 Only single and double pulse can be designed Just as a stand alone pulse generator the capability that is built into the digital pulse generator allows generation of these two waveforms This allows generation of single or double pulse patterns having a fixed high and low amplitude values In case you need to design complex tra
229. ion profiles graphically Sample rates up to 250MS s are available with memory size up to 512k Channels 1 and 2 are both synchronized to the same sampling clock however each channel can output a different waveform shape and length Getting Started 1 Introduction Based entirely on digital design the 8102 has no analog functions resident in its hardware circuits and therefore data has to be downloaded to the instrument for it to start generating waveforms The instrument can compute and generate a number of standard functions such as sine square triangle and others Complex waveforms can be computed in external utilities converted to an appropriate format and downloaded to the 8102 as waveform coordinates Dedicated waveform memory stores waveforms in memory segments and allows playback of a selected waveform when required The waveforms are backed up by batteries or can be stored in a flash memory for use at a later time Frequency accuracy of the output waveform is determined by the clock reference Using the internal TCXO the reference oscillator provides 1ppm accuracy and stability over time and temperature If higher accuracy and or stability are required one may connect an external reference oscillator to the rear panel input and use this input as the reference for the 8102 Frequency may be programmed from the front panel with 11 digits of resolution and with up to 14 digits from an external controller so using an external refe
230. is identical for both channels Depth The Depth parameter programs the modulation depth or index in percent of the un modulated CW amplitude The depth is symmetrical about the center of the CW amplitude Figure 4 9 the AM Panel ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Sweep Freq Hz min Modulation The Sweep group contains parameters for controlling sweep options To turn the Sweep function on and off click on the SWP button in Modulation group The various parameters that control sweep features are described below Step Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options linear or logarithmic Direction Use these keys to program sweep direction Up select sweep from Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation Parameters Allow adjustment of Sweep Start Stop and Sweep Time You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Mark parameter To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 HI keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new setting Figure 4 10 the Sweep Modulatio
231. is with a precision of 1 65536 The Model 8102 has 512k waveform memory capacity Each horizontal point has a unique address the first being 00000 and the last depends on the memory option In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time from address O to the last address The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter Unlike the built in standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument s memory Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs Arbitrary memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory depends on the option that is installed in your instrument The various options are listed in Chapter 1 of this manual If you purchased the 8102 with in its basic configuration you should expect to have 512k words to load waveforms Waveforms are created using small sections of the arbitrary memory The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments up to 10k and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment each having a unique length Minimum segmen
232. ision of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DDS waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6 13 Table 13 Sinewave Flatness DDS Output Test 8102 Sine error Um LEES Reading _ Frequenc Error Limits Me 10 MHz 6 0 15 Divisions TT 50 MHz 6 1 2 Divisions TT 100 MHz 6 41 2 Divisions TT This tests the operation of the trigger circuit It includes tests for the Trigger operation triggered gated and counted bursts run modes It also tests the Characteristics operation of the trigger advance options the delayed trigger and re trigger functions as well as the trigger input level and slope sensitivity The run modes are common to both channels and therefore the tests are performed on channel 1 only 6 12 Performance Checks Test Procedures Trigger Gate and Equipment Oscilloscope function generator counter Burst RS Preparation Characteristics 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20d B feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode As required by the test Wave TTL Square 4 Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 28 MHz Waveform Sinewave Burst Count 1e6 counts each channel Amplitude 1V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure
233. ision shows that each data point can be placed along the vertical axis with a precision of 1 65 536 Memory Depth Defines how many data points can be stored for a single waveform cycle The 8102 has 512k waveform memory capacity Having such large memory capacity is an advantage Modern applications in the telecommunications industry require simulation of long waveforms without repeatable segments The only way to create such waveforms is having sufficient memory depth On the other hand if you do not need to use very long waveforms but must have many other waveforms stored in your working memory the 8102 lets you divide the memory bank to smaller segments and load different waveforms into each segment Downloading waveforms to the 8102 and managing arbitrary Generating memory are explained in the programming section of this manual Arbitrary This section assumes that you have already downloaded Waveforms waveforms and want the instrument to output these waveforms Refer to Figure 3 15 and use the following description to learn how to output arbitrary waveforms and how to program arbitrary waveform parameters To select Arbitrary waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms then Arbitrary The screen as shown in Figure 3 15 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequ
234. itch between two frequencies is always coherent The CW and shifted frequencies can be programmed with 10 digits throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument from 100 uHz to 100 MHz The FSK sequence is designed in an FSK table that can either be loaded from the front panel or downloaded from a remote interface from a utility such as ArbConnection An example of the FSK table as created in ArbConnection is shown in Figure 3 22 When you select FSK modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 23 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms FSK Data defines the sequence of which the frequencies will toggle FSK data is stored in an external table The length of the table is limited from 1 to 4096 toggle sequences The FSK Data table contains a list of 0 s and 1 s which determine the sequence 0 defines CW and 1 defines shifted frequency CW Frequency defines the frequency of the carrier waveform In this case the CW frequency will also be used as the idle frequency Using this standard FSK function the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine Shifted Frequency defines the frequency of which the generator will shift when logic level 1 is sensed at the trigger input Baud defines the rate of which the frequencies are toggled The rate can be programmed within the range of 1 bits s to 10 Mbits
235. ith your particular adapter Before proceed with the remote interface installation install an adapter card and follow the instructions in the following paragraphs GPIB Connection Direct connection between a host computer and a single device with GPIB is not recommended since GPIB adapter is usually expensive and is not really required for direct connection Use GPIB connection in cases where download speed is critical to the system or when you already have GPIB system in place and you are adding the 8102 as a GPIB device The GPIB port is connected with a special 24 wire cable Refer interconnection issues to your GPIB supplier After you connect the 8102 to the GPIB port proceed to the GPIB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to select a GPIB address 2 5 8101 8102 User Manual 2 6 Selecting a Remote interface USB Connection Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with USB is most recommended as this does not require any specific considerations and device configuration Just connect your Tabor 8102 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure After you connect the 8102 to the USB port proceed to the USB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to install the USB driver LAN Connection Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with 10 100 Basel is possible but you must use a special cable that has
236. ition The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending SREO The generator always ignores the value of bit 6 Summary of SRE Commande is given in the following SREO Clears all bits in the register SRE1 Not used SRE2 Not used SRE4 Not used SRES Not used SRE16 Service request on MAV SRE32 Service request on ESB summary bit SRE128 Not used The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special applications The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEE STD 488 2 as specific conditions which can be monitored and reported back to the user upon request The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the ESR common query The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a CLS common command with a power on and when read by ESR The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE STD 488 2 Description of the various bits is given in the following Bit 0 Operation Complete Generated in response to the OPC command lt indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command Bit 1 Request Control This bit operation is disabled on the Model 8102 Bit 2 Query Error This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present Standard Event Status Enable Register ES
237. ive transitions will trigger the generator when the NEG option is selected In Gated mode two transitions in the same direction are required to gate on and off the output The trigger slope command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Type Default Description POSitive Discrete POS Selects the positive going edge NEGative Discrete Selects the negative going edge Response The 8102 will return POS or NEG depending on the selected trigger slope setting RETRigger OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the re trigger mode on and off This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT CONT OFF Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the re trigger mode off ON Discrete Enables the re trigger mode Response The 8102 will return OFF or ON depending on the selected option RET Rigger Time lt time gt Description This parameter specifies the amount of time that will elapse between the end of the delivery of the waveform cycle and the beginning of the next waveform cycle Re trigger can be initiated from any of the selected advance options The re trigger command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Par
238. k group is comprised of parameters that control the sample clock frequency The sample clock setting affects the 8102 in arbitrary mode only The sample clock rate is programmed in units of S s samples per second and will affect the instrument only when it is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms The SCLK parameter has no effect on the frequency of the standard waveforms The two switches in the SCLK group select between internal and external sample clock inputs The internal is the default setting When you select the external sample clock option make sure an appropriate signal is connected to the external sample clock connector on the rear panel To access the required parameter click on the button until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading 10MHz Ref The 10MHz Ref controls toggle between an internal and external references The default setting is internal which provides frequency accuracy of 1ppm If such accuracy is not sufficient for your Using the Memory Partition Table ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels application click on the external option but make sure that a reference source is applied to the rear panel connector otherwise the accuracy
239. l poll has occurred TRG Triggers the generator from the remote interface This command effects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to BUS WAI Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface The Model 8102 uses the Status Byte register group and the Standard Event register group to record various instrument conditions Figure 5 1 shows the SCPI status system An Event Register is a read only register that reports defined conditions within the generator Bits in an event register are latched When an event bit is set subsequent state changes are ignored Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the CLS command The RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register Querying an event register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit The user can read from and write to an Enable Register Querying an Enable Register will not clear it The CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear bits in the event registers To enable bits in an enable register write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits
240. l be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Pulse Train Design Format F DC Intervals Time Level Points ef La Append Insert Delete Delete All Unda Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 16 ms Repeat 3 Duration x DI Ims Boni Figure 4 29 the Pulse Editor Single Section The view Single Section shows on the pulse screen one section at a time Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Channel 1 The view Channel 1 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 pulse train If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1 the waveform screen will show a clear display Pulse Editor Options ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Channel 2 The view Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 pulse train If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 2 the waveform screen will show a clear display Options The view options command opens the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 30 Use this dialog box to fine tune the pulse composer to the way it should deal with operational modes and the waveform memory Information on options is given later in this chapter Mode of Operation C es Select Mod
241. l operation let s look at the toolbars at the left top of the screen as shown in Figures 4 2 and 4 2a arbConnection lt lt Tabor Electronics gt gt Untitled cad Si oj xj File View System Help Link Jaen Offline D Ge NM Figure 4 2 ArbConnection s Toolbars 4 5 8101 8102 User Manual Figure 4 2a the Panels Toolbar ArbConnection Features The Control Panels 4 6 The standard Windows Menu Bar is the top bar It provides access to main system controls like saving files and viewing or removal of screen images The second bar is called Link bar It provides direct access to different instruments that are active on the active interface bus ArbConnection can control a number of 8102 units simultaneously If the instruments were connected to the interface while invoking ArbConnection they will automatically be detected by the program and will be placed in the Link pull down window The active instrument is displayed with its associated address If you run ArbConnection in offline mode the Link bar will show 8102 Offline The Panels toolbar as shown in Figure 4 2a provides direct access to instrument control panels The individual control panels are explained later in this chapter The Main Standard Arbitrary Trigger and the other buttons will bring up to the screen panels that are associated with these names The Composers button provides access to the Waveform and Pulse composers The firs
242. lay Tests 8102 Delay Setting Counter Reading Pass Fail 1ys 230ns ims Lime is is 50ms 8101 8102 User Manual Re trigger Equipment Counter ArbConnection Characteristics Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Pulse Width Measurement Ch A Slope Negative 2 Connect the counter channel A to the 8102 output 3 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 99 4 Configure the 8102 channel 1 only as follows SCLK 200 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level oV Re trigger On Re trigger Delay As required by the test Trigger Source Bus Output On Test Procedure 1 Manually trigger the instrument 2 Perform trigger delay tests using Tables 6 16 Table 16 Re Trigger Delay Tests 8102 Delay Setting Counter Reading Pass Fail iust85ns ims ims 50us ts is s5s0ms 6 16 Performance Checks Test Procedures Trigger Slope Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continue Waveform TTL
243. le Example 4 64 Chapter 5 Remote Programming Reference Title Page Walsh This rapida ii tiesa 5 3 INthOdUCTION 1O SGPU WEE 5 3 Command Formats EE 5 4 Command Separator A ey Ab dtd lo Noh A NS NO eA oN ee IS AU 5 4 The MIN and MAX Parameters cc cescescesseesscsceessessessesecescessesseseceesassaseeusesseaseaneentenss 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting EE 5 5 Guery Response FORMAL ecu E E ee EE e 5 5 SCPI Command Terminato aenaran a E aI 5 5 IEEE STD 488 2 COMMON Commande 5 5 SCPI Parameter Type iia 5 6 Numeric Parameters cccccooccnncccnncnnccccnnnnncononcnnnnnnannnnnonnnnnnonncnnnnnnannnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnns 5 6 RIESEN NEE 5 6 Boolean Parameters ccccecseccecceccecceeeceeceeeeceeceeeneeceeseeneeseeseeeeeeeaeeseenenseeneeseeseeeaeens 5 6 Arbitrary eet E 5 6 Binary Block Parameters ts 5 7 SGPI Syntax and WES iia ia 5 7 Instrument Control COMMAndS euiciinicienroi dci 5 14 Standard Waveforms Control Commande 5 21 Arbitrary Waveforms Control COMMANS EE 5 28 Modulated Waveforms Control Commande 5 35 FM Modulation Programms iaa 5 38 AM modulation Programming EE 5 41 Sweep Modulation Programming a cisma 5 42 FSK Modulation Programming oocccccccccncccnnnnonoonncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rnnnnnnnnnnnr 5 45 PSK Modulation Programming pila 5 46 EE lee eer 5 50 A O aa aap edeen aeeenameanmeaesc tances 5 55 Digital Pulse Pr a 5 56 System Command eege EE 5 61 5 1 8101 8102 U
244. ler sections and Figure 4 33 shows the design of the fifth section only of the pulse train ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor t 101 x File Edit View Tools Help PARIENTE Sh F om t Vertical Scale 10 Y 1 25YDiv Horizontal Scale 80ms 8ms Diy Figure 4 32 Complete Pulse Train Design itled Ch1 10 x Ele Edit View Soe Help D Ge RH E amp En a section 5 DI Si E cn GH2 Vertical Scale 10 Y 1 254 Div Horizontal Scale 35 2ms 3 52ms Div Figure 4 33 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design 4 51 8101 8102 User Manual Now that we somewhat understand the terms we use for the pulse design we start with an example how to design the pulse train as shown in Figure 4 32 lf you already have some pulses shown on your pulse composer screen click on New to start from a fresh page Another step before you design your pulse train is to set the design parameters in the options menu that will determine the way that the pulse will be distributed in your waveform memory Click on View gt 0Options and refer to Figure 4 34 throughout the following description 10 x OSA am l aet Fut train elt cH1 CH2 i 14 d i Mode of Operation Memory Management Freely Select Mode of Operation C Do not Override Loaded Segments Force Pulse Train to Single Segment e Allow Pulse Design with no Arbitrary Waveform Made Limitation m Pulse Transition Management Ze Allow Sy
245. litude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Cycles sets the number of 0 crossing cycles for the sinc function Note that the default value is 4 Changing the value to a different number requires re calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector Reset Parameters Resets the sinc pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults Using the Instrument 3 Gaussian Wave The gaussian pulse waveform is useful in many applications The gaussian pulse parameters are re computed every time a parameter is changed 1000 points are allocated for the gaussian pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically The gaussian pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to gau
246. lse generator Parameters Name Type FIXed Discrete USER Discrete MODulated Discrete PULSe Discrete Response Default FIX Description Selects the standard waveform shapes There is an array of waveforms that is built into the program You can find these waveform shapes in the standard waveforms section Selects the arbitrary waveform shapes Arbitrary waveforms must be loaded to the 8102 memory before they can be replayed You can find information on arbitrary waveforms in the appropriate sections in this manual Selects the modulated waveforms There is an array of built in modulation schemes However you can also build custom modulation using the arbitrary function Selects the digital pulse generator auxiliary function Note that when you select this function all waveform generation of the 8102 are purged and the 8102 is transformed to behave as if it was a stand alone pulse generator The digital pulse generator functions and parameters can be programmed using the auxiliary commands The 8102 will return FIX USER SEQ MOD COUN PULS or HALF depending on the present 8102 setting 5 20 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands 9 Standard This group is used to control the standard waveforms and their Waveforms respective parameters There is an array of standard waveforms that could be used withou
247. lt Description lt frequency gt 10e 3to Numeric 505e3 Programs the marker frequency position in units of 100e6 Hz Response The 8102 will return the present marker frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned 5 44 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands FSK Modulation Use the following command for programming the FSK parameters P FSK control is internal The frequency will shift from carrier to rogramming shifted frequency setting at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the FSK data table The commands for programming the frequency shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes FSK FREQuency SHIFted lt shift_freq gt Description This programs the shifted frequency The frequency shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 100e3 Programs the shifted frequency value in units of Hz 100e6 Response The 8102 will return the present shifted frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FSK FREQuency BAUD lt baud gt Description This allows the user
248. m memory is extracted and routed to the Digital to Analog Converter DAC The DAC converts the digital data to an analog signal and the output amplifier completes the task by amplifying or attenuating the signal at the output connector There is no need to use the complete memory bank every time an arbitrary waveform is generated Waveform memory can be divided 1 7 8101 8102 User Manual 1 8 Safety Considerations Supplied Accessories Specifications into many smaller segments and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment The Tabor Model 8102 can be operated from either GPIB USB or LAN interfaces The product is supplied with IVI COM driver and ArbConnection software ArbConnection simulates an array of mechanical front panels with the necessary push buttons displays and dials to operate the Model 8102 from a remote interface as if it is a bench top instrument ArbConnection also allows on screen creation and editing of complex waveforms and patterns to drive the 8102 various outputs It is highly recommended that the user become familiar with the 8102 front panel its basic features functions and programming concepts as described in this and the following chapters The Model 8102 has been manufactured according to international safety standards The instrument meets EN61010 1 and UL1244 standards for safety of commercial electronic measuring and test equipment for instruments with an exposed metal chassis tha
249. mand will toggle the carrier waveform CW on and off This command affects all n PSK function and has no effect on the PSK function The carrier off function is especially useful as direct input for amp Q vector generators that need the digital information only and supply the carrier information separately Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 1 Sets the carrier output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the output is on or O if the output is off 5 49 8101 8102 User Manual Run Mode The Run Mode Commands group is used to synchronize device actions with external events These commands control the trigger Commands modes of the Model 8102 The generator can be placed in Triggered Gated or Burst mode Trigger source is selectable from an external source an internal re trigger generator or a software trigger Optional nodes were omitted from these commands The Run Mode settings affect all waveform shapes equally except when using the modulated waveforms In the case of modulated waveform the output idles on the carrier waveform until stimulated to output a modulation cycle or burst of cycles Additional information on the run mode options and how the 8102 behaves in the various run mode options is given in Chapter 3 Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable
250. memory Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel before you download data to the generator 2 Waveform data points have 16 bit values 3 Data point range is 0 to 65 535 decimal 4 Data point 0 to data point 65 535 corresponds to full scale amplitude setting Figure 5 2 shows how to initially prepare the 16 bit word for a waveform data point Data has to be further manipulated to a final format that the instrument can accept and process as waveform point MSB high byte lt low byte LSB D15 p14 or or Jor foro o9 os o7 os os os os o2 vs oo Figure 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation Figure 5 3 shows the same 16 bit word as in Figure 5 2 except the high and low bytes are swapped This is the correct format that the 8102 expects as waveform point data The first byte to be sent to the generator is the low byte and then high byte 5 30 Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands low byte lt gt high byte LG os os fos os foe or foo oss for fors Jove fon foro o9 os Figure 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation Parameters Name Type Description lt header gt Discrete Contains information on the size of the binary block that contains waveform coordinates lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the waveform coordinates TRACe DEFine lt segment_number gt lt length gt Descri
251. ment accion cinco 2 3 Preparation TOR Us o cates cuter lt lidia sio 2 4 TE e sons Na 2 4 Installing Software Utilities econo iio 2 4 Controlling the Instrument from Remote AAA 2 5 Connecting to a Remote interface cscs aceccsesteecepercesnztenpedea dened suger EENS raro ralen cipal 2 5 Selecting a Remote interface coincida 2 6 GPIB Configuration EE 2 7 USB GOH AL ONT a ss he cnt de ect sett ll la 2 8 Ee pile Ile EE 2 14 Choosing a Static 1P Address acconmird conato rica 2 16 8101 8102 User Manual 2 2 Installation Overview Unpacking and Initial Inspection Safety Precautions Performance Checks This chapter contains information and instructions necessary to prepare the Model 8102 for operation Details are provided for initial inspection grounding safety requirements repackaging instructions for storage or shipment installation information and Ethernet address configuration Unpacking and handling of the generator requires normal precautions and procedures applicable to handling of sensitive electronic equipment The contents of all shipping containers should be checked for included accessories and certified against the packing slip to determine that the shipment is complete The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present A CAU
252. mmable using the TRIG BURS COUN command Response The 8102 will return OFF or ON depending on the selected option TRIGger BURSt COUNt lt burst gt Description This function sets the number of cycles when the Burst Mode is on Use the init cont off trig burs on commands to select the Burst Mode Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt burst gt 1to1M Numeric 1 Programs the burst count integer only Response The 8102 will return the present burst count value 5 51 8101 8102 User Manual TRIGger DELay OFF ON 0 1 Description This command will toggle the delayed trigger mode on and off This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT CONT OFF Note System delay must always be considered when using an external trigger System delay is measured from a valid trigger input to the transition of the first waveform point It has a fixed period that adds to the programmed trigger delay value Consult Appendix A for the system delay specification Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the delayed trigger mode off ON Discrete Enables the delayed trigger mode Response The 8102 will return OFF or ON depending on the selected option TRIGger DELayTime lt time gt Description The trigger delay time parameter defines the time that will elapse from a valid trigger signal to the initiation of the first output waveform Trigger delay can be turned ON and O
253. mmand FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark to the command For example the following command sets the output function to square SOUR FUNC SHAP SQR Query the output function by executing SOUR FUNC SHAP The response to a query depends on the format of the command In general a response to a query contains current values or settings of the generator Commands that set values can be queried for their current value Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode IEEE STD 488 2 common queries generate responses which are common to all IEEE STD 488 2 compatible instruments A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a lt new line gt character The IEEE STD 488 EOI message is a lt new line gt character Command string termination always resets the current SCPI command path to the root level The IEEE STD 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions like reset trigger and status operations Common commands begin with an asterisk are four to five characters in length and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon
254. modulating waveform is programmed from 10mHz to 100kHz Marker programs a unique frequency where the SYNC output generates a pulse to mark this frequency Trigger Baseline defines the idle state of the FM output when placed in trigger mode There are two options continuous carrier or dc level The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered generates the FM waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform Selecting dc the output generates dc level until triggered Generates the FM waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Offset defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another 3 41 8101 8102 User Manual FSK 3 42 BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS G CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Modulation Triangle TYE mm Ramp Sh o Arbitrary SINE Frequency Deviation BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS a CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Figure 21 Modulation Waveform Shapes FSK Frequency Shift keying modulation allows frequency hops between two pre programmed frequencies Carrier Waveform Frequency and Shifted Frequency Note that CW is sinewave only and that the sw
255. mputed as part of the pulse period and therefore if you do not plan to have a delayed pulse change its value to 0 s Rise Time The rise time defines the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its low level to its high level settings Do not confuse this parameter with the industry standard interpretations of rise time such 10 to 90 of amplitude The rise time is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore if you do not plan to have linear transitions change its value to 0 s High Time The high time defines the time idles on its high level setting Do not confuse this parameter with the industry standard interpretations of pulse width that is normally measured at 50 of amplitude level Fall Time The fall time defines the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its high level to its low level settings Do not confuse this parameter with the industry standard interpretations of fall time such 90 to 10 of amplitude The fall time is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore if you do not plan to have linear transitions change its value to 0 s High Level The high level parameter defines the top amplitude level of the pulse Any value is acceptable as long as it is larger than the low Using the Instrument 3 Using the Auxiliary Functions level setting and does not exceed 16 V and does not fall short of the 50 mV minimum high to low level setting Low Level The low level parameter defines the
256. mum of 512k words lol xj PE GR S SR Wavelenath 1024 Activeseg 9 R Anchor 1023 r Anchor Waveform Amplitude m Level Adjuster Start pts 10 Max 32767 Cycles Manual Scale End pts 1023 Min 32768 bh E Auto Default A a lt lt 3 d Dx r Equation sl Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands ES Jamp sin 1 O omg p p t 0 3 y OK Figure 4 20 the Waveform Screen 4 33 8101 8102 User Manual Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 34 Notice on the left top and on the right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen These are the anchors The anchors are used as the start and end pointers where your waveform will be created For example if you want to create a sine waveform between point 100 and point 500 you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built in library There are two ways to control anchor placements 1 Click and hold your mouse cursor on the left anchor triangle and then drag the curtain to the left position Do the same for the right anchor Notice the X and Y coordinates at the top of the waveform screen and how they change to correspond to your anchor placement 2 You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform
257. n Panel 4 19 8101 8102 User Manual FSK PSK 4 20 Freq Hz Modulation The FSK PSK panel contains parameters for controlling the FSK and the PSK functions To select the required function click on the appropriate button and adjust the parameters in the associated group The various controls in the FSK PSK groups are described below Figure 4 11 the FSK PSK Modulation Panel FSK Control Data The Control Data button in the FSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base frequency and shifted frequency It contains a list of 0 and 1 and the output will repeatedly follow the frequency shift keying sequence in the same order as programmed 0 1 Frequency In FSK the carrier waveform CW has two frequencies an initial frequency level which is set by the 0 Frequency parameter and shifted frequency which is set by the 1 Frequency The control data table has a list of 0 and 1 values that flag when the frequency shifts from base to shifted frequency ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Baud The baud parameter sets the rate of which the generator steps through the sequence of the FSK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker setting programs a specific step index in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the FSK marker output PSK Control Data The Contr
258. n in Figure 7 9 Click on Back to close NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box and turn off the power to the 8102 The next time you power up the instrument the device automatically reboots with the new firmware in effect 7 53 8101 8102 User Manual WW2572 Boot TE NETConfig Firmware Updas Den Firma ware Upoaite e Ethernet Address p 0 13 Figure 7 8 Firmware Update Path WW2572 Boot TE NETConfig Firmware x a 3 s Fe E qe SCh Firm are Vpr ate Ethernet Address 00 13 76 Figure 7 9 Firmware Update Completed 7 54 Appendices Appendix Title Page A lee Men adas A 1 8101 8102 User Manual Configuration Output Channels Inter Channel Dependency Separate controls Common Controls Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Units Range Resolution and Accuracy Skew Between Channels Sample Clock Range Continuous Run Mode All Other Run Modes Resolution Accuracy and Stability 10MHz Reference Clock Standard External Frequency Connector Impedance and Level Appendix A Specifications 2 semi independent Output on off amplitude offset standard waveforms user waveforms user waveform size sequence table Sample clock frequency reference source trigger modes trigger advance source SYNC output Modulation Channel 2 waveform start trails channel 1 waveform start by a programmable number of points Waveform points 0 to 512k points 1 point 1 ns
259. nce IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Command Error Execution Error Device Denendent Frror Query Error Request Control Operation Complete Standard Event Status Reaister ESR I Power On o User Request Standard Event Status Reaister l71615 4 s 211 0 ESE lt value gt Output Queue Service 7 read by Serial Poll Request lisboa aT To Status Byte Register Generation read by STB A Ps i Service Request Enable Register lait She lt value Figure 5 5 SCPI Status Registers 5 69 8101 8102 User Manual Service Request Enable Register SRE Standard Event Status Register ESR 5 70 The Service Request enable register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register The value of the unused bit 6 is always zero The Service Request Enable Register is written using the SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled cond
260. ncies at an interval determined by the sweep time value and controlled by a step type determined by the sweep step parameter There are two sweep modes Linear where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is linear and Logarithmic where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is logarithmic The commands for programming the frequency sweep function are described below SWEep STARt lt start_freq gt Description This specifies the sweep start frequency The 8102 will normally sweep from start to stop frequencies however if the sweep direction is revered the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform frequency range Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 10e3 Programs the sweep start frequency Sweep start is 100e6 programmed in units of Hz Response The 8102 will return the present sweep start frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep STOP lt stop_freq gt Description This specifies the sweep stop frequency The 8102 will normally sweep from start to stop frequencies however if the sweep direction is revered the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies The start and stop f
261. nection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 512k points Waveform Sine wave Test Procedure 1 Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail 6 31 8101 8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank 6 32 Chapter 7 Adjustments and Firmware Update Title Page Whats IA DAIS Chapters entraron tipa 7 3 PEMONMANCE Checks in eto ii 7 3 Environmental Conditions esencat a a ra Ea E Eaa A aa 7 3 ME AAA EE eege 7 3 Recommended Test Equipment Sis Apia 7 4 Adj stme nt Procedures crniiin n ta 7 4 Reference Oscillators Adlustmments AEN 7 6 Base Line Offset Adjustments AAA 7 8 Offset e a tia e ida 7 11 Amplitude Adjustments usina las 7 15 Pulse Response Adjustments ii ii 7 24 Flaimess ao EAEN leidas airada radicada dad 7 24 Base Line Offset Adjustments iii ii ta 7 29 Offset ACIS SHINS a E laci n 7 32 lee Ee Eu EC 7 36 Pulse Response Adjustments scsi Get nnna 7 44 Flatness Adj StMEntS ceca anio di 7 45 Updating 8102 tu E 7 49 7 1 8101 8102 User Manual 7 2 Adjustments and Firmware Update What s in This Chapter What s in This This chapter provides adjustment information for the 8102 dual channel waveform generator The same procedures are used for the Chapter Model 8101 except all references to the second channel should be ignored A A WARNING The procedures descri
262. nel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Modulation Run Mode Burst Burst Count 5 Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Re trigger On Re trigger Delay 200 us Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify re triggered FM burst standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Repetitive burst of 5 cycle sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Re trigger delay 200 us Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz 6 22 Performance Checks Test Procedures Test Results Pass Fail AM Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation AM Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 1 kHz Mod Depth 50 Mod Wave Chi Sine Mod Wave Ch2 Triangle Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude modulated sine Mod depth 50 5 Test Results Pass Fail
263. ner is not available purchase replacement materials 2 Be sure the carton is well sealed with strong tape or metal straps 3 Mark the carton with the model and serial number If it is to be shipped show sending and return address on two sides of the box 2 3 8101 8102 User Manual 2 4 Preparation for Use Installation Installing Software Utilities lay NOTE If the instrument is to be shipped to Tabor Electronics for calibration or repair attach a tag to the instrument identifying the owner Note the problem symptoms and service or repair desired Record the model and serial number of the instrument Show the RMA Returned Materials Authorization order as well as the date and method of shipment ALWAYS OBTAIN AN RMA NUMBER FROM THE FACTORY BEFORE SHIPPING THE 8102 TO TABOR ELECTRONICS Preparation for use includes removing the instrument from the container box installing the software and connecting the cables to its input and output connectors If this instrument is intended to be installed in a rack it must be installed in a way that clears air passage to its cooling fans For inspection and normal bench operation place the instrument on the bench in such a way that will clear any obstructions to its rear fan to ensure proper airflow A CAUTION Using the 8102 without proper airflow will result in damage to the instrument The 8102 is supplied with a CD that contains the following programs IVI Driver
264. nerated at the output Operation connector and therefore flaws in the memory can cause distortions and impurity of the output waveforms Each channel has its own working memory and therefore each channel is tested separately Waveform memory Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnection Preparation 1 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the distortion analyzer input Configure the 8102 as follows SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 512k Waveform Sine wave SCLK 250 MS s Test Procedure 1 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail Damnta Intarfanna This tests the communication with the 8102 using the various interface Remote Interfaces options Connecting and setting up the 8102 for operation with the various interface options is described in Chapter 2 Before you proceed with and of the following tests make sure first that the 8102 is configured to operate with the selected test GPIB operation requires setting of the GPIB address LAN operation requires correct setting of the LAN parameters and USB operation requires that the USB port is configured correctly and USB driver installed on the host computer 6 29 8101 8102 User Manual GPIB Control Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnec
265. nfidence or test various commands using the command editor This way you can assure that commands or syntax that you use in your application will behave exactly the same way as it responds to the editor commands A complete list of SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5 L in Pl The Log File is very useful for programmers that do not wish to ogging SC spend a lot of time on manuals When you use ArbConnection Commands every time you click on a button or change parameter the command is logged in the same format as should be used in external applications Figure 4 43 shows an example of a log file and a set of SCPI commands as resulted from some changes made on ArbConnection panels You can set up the 8102 from ArbConnection to the desired configuration log the commands in the log file and then copy and paste to your application without any modifications Of course this is true for simple commands that do not involve file download but on the other hand this is a great tool to get you started with SCPI programming 4 63 8101 8102 User Manual E Communication Log file Views x Show Full Log Save As Commands amp Responses Inst Sel 1 DUTP ON Inst Sel 2 DUTP ON DUTP SYNC ON InstSel 1 VOLT 1 000e0 Inst Sel 2 VOLT 8 000e0 Inst Sel 1 FUNC SHAP SOU SQU DCYC 15 00 FREQ 5 180000000e6 INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR BUS TRIG LE 1 000 TRIG RETR ON TRIG RETR TIME 2 000000000e 4 Figure 4 43 Log Fi
266. ng and deleting one or all index lines The Undo button is useful in cases where an error was made and restoration of the last operation is critical Now that we are better familiar with the pulse editor and its options we are ready to start building the first section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 36 Point and click on the New icon and open the pulse editor Type in the level and time intervals as shown in Figure 4 36 Note that the pulse segments are being created on the screen as you type the values SEHR Vertical Scale 10 1 25W Div Horizontal Scale 14ms D 4ms Diw C section 1 y MES view Section 1 Y d ST W Pulse Editor Section t lt DC Intervals gt 31 Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals Time Level Points ae Section Structure Indes Loval Time Cumulative ndex Level Interval Time D 1 1 Append Insert Delete r Section Properties Design Units VM ms Section Start O ms Repeat R Duration x A 14 ms Figure 4 36 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Y Tips 1 Use the tab button to edit the Section Structure fields 2 Use Append to add an index line at the end of the list 3 Use insert to add a segment above a focused line Before we proceed with the design of the next section pay attention to some values that are now available on the compos
267. ng to another PSK MARKer lt index gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 8102 will generate a pulse designated as PSK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the PSK data list The PSK MARK command is common to all PSK modulation functions Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position 4000 integer only Response The 8102 will return the present marker position 5 48 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands PSK BAUD lt baud gt Description This allows the user to select n PSK baud The baud is the interval of which the symbols stream in the n PSK data array as they are clocked with the baud generator Note that this command is dedicated for programming the n PSK modulation function only and will have no effect on the PSK function Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1to Numeric 10e3 Programs the baud of which the symbols stream in 10e6 the n PSK data table Baud is programmed in units of Hz Response The 8102 will return the present baud value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned PSK CARRier STATe OFF ON 0 1 Description This com
268. nit under test is sensitive to level transitions make sure you remove the cable from this connector before turning the output state off Source Selects if the output is synchronized to channel 1 or 2 In fact the two channels are always synchronized between themselves however one may select either channel because the waveforms may be different for each channel and thus the selection options Position Lets you place the sync start at any point along the length of the waveform Placement resolution is 4 points As default the sync signal is positioned at the beginning of the waveform The SYNC parameters are shown in Figure 3 12 The Menu is accessible by selecting the Outputs soft key as shown in Figure 3 3 Applying Filters Two filters are available for each channel These filters have fixed cutoff frequencies of which their properties are specified in Appendix A The built in filters are switched in after the DAC circuit and are used for reducing the noise harmonics and spurious signals above the cutoff frequency The built in filters are available for the user in standard arbitrary and modulated modes The only function where the Model 8102 does not allow external control is when standard sinusoidal waveform is selected 3 23 8101 8102 User Manual Generating Standard Waveforms 3 24 lay Note The default output function of the generator is the sine waveform The instrument is using filters to reconstruct this
269. nnel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Chi Amplitude 10V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP17 for DMM reading of 3 535V 30mV Setup 20 3V Amplitude Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV 7 15 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 21 Setup 22 7 16 Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 3V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP18 for DMM reading of 1 0606V 7mV 1V Amplitude Output Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch1 Output On CAL SERV 5 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP19 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV 500mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC
270. nononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnos 6 13 Mixed Trigger Advance E 6 13 Delayed Trigger ge EE 6 15 Re trigger Characteristics coi 6 16 E 6 17 6 1 8101 8102 User Manual o A nen opie rr en Cherri A irrn na Cory rere a remy neni een err err reer 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Charachertsiice 6 18 FM Standard Waveforms ccccccccccceccseseeceeceeeceeeueuenseeceeeeeesaeusaseeeeeeeseeaeaseceeeeseeeees 6 18 Triggered FM Standard Waveforms AAA 6 19 FM Burst Standard Waveforms seina a a a a 6 20 Gated FM Standard Waveiomms ccccccccccccsceesececeeseseueeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseeeanaeaens 6 21 Re triggered FM Bursts Standard Waveforms oooooccccccnnnocccccnonocccccnnnnancncnnnnncnnnnnnnccn 6 22 Eet a ed ees 6 23 ESC o lada 6 24 PO a A ta ds 6 25 SOW CGD E 6 26 SYNC Output ODS ATOM EE 6 27 SYNG Qualifier Bitiis sented eas ee Ake ead das See ed eh ees 6 27 EA OK Ee le 6 27 Waveform Memory Operation concolor cercas iaa delete ici add 6 29 EL O 6 29 Remote ln Eet e 6 29 GPIB Controliariania atacada A A Nera 6 30 USB CA e o aa 6 30 tt ee Ee Ee EE 6 31 6 2 What s in This Chapter CAUTION dp Lt GP ELEC ICAL OM UGNG GIEN E FEB i Performance Checks Environmental Conditions Warm up Period Performance Checks What s in This Chapter This chapter provides performance tests necessary to troubleshoot the Model 8102 Universal Waveform Generator A A WARNING The procedures described in t
271. normally no necessary because ArbConnection makes sure that programming errors cannot be made from the panels however while executing commands from the Command Editor errors can be generated and the only way to monitor the errors is by using this command Clear Queue clears the error queue The error queue can buffer up to 35 errors and then generates an error queue overflow message while ignoring new errors This command clears the error queue and allows fresh errors to be captured Data Base This Data Base is used for displaying or monitoring of certain parameters that are stored in the flash memory These are Instrument serial number Last calibration data 8102 installed options and the installed firmware version Filters The Filters group has two sets of switches one for each channel Filters can be turned on and off freely as long as you are not generating the standard sine waveform The following filter options are available Off no filter is applied to the output path 25MHz a Bessel type filter that has 25 MHz cutoff frequency 50MHz a Bessel type filter that has 50 MHz cutoff frequency 60MHz an Elliptic type filter that has 60 MHz cutoff frequency 120MHz an Elliptic type filter that has 120 MHz cutoff frequency The Calibration panel provides access to remote calibration procedures To access the remote calibration panel you will need to have a valid User Name and Password and to quality to perform
272. ntinuous Trigger Parameters Source 549 Ear Slope Positive Level 1 60 Triggered Gated Re Trigger Trigger Delay State OFF State OFF BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC STD Pos RUN TRIG SRC CH1 Figure 9 Trigger Run Mode Parameters The delayed trigger function operates in conjunction with the triggered and counted burst modes When enabled it inhibits the output signal for a pre determined period after a valid trigger The delay time defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger hardware or software to output To enable the delayed trigger feature scroll down to the Trigger Delay State field and press Enter Use the down key to change the sate to ON and press enter again to lock in the state position The delay field then becomes active Scroll down to the delay field and press enter Modify the delay to match your delay requirement and press Enter again Delayed Trigger Note that the minimum delay is 200ns and can be increased to over 20 seconds with 20ns resolution The re trigger function operates in conjunction with the triggered and counted burst modes When enabled it does not modify the output except when a valid trigger is received lt then starts an automatic sequence of internal triggers that generate repeated output cycles or bursts The time in the re trigger group defines the time that will lapse from the end of the signal to the start of the next signal Re Trigger To enable
273. ock settings that will be changed on the generator The settings in this summary cannot be affected from the pulse editor options settings These are being computed and modified specifically for the current pulse train pattern and will change from pattern to pattern Accept Reject These buttons are the final step before you download the pulse train to the instrument If you are unhappy with the instrument setting and want to change some of the options there is still time Point and click on the Reject button and go do your changes Point and click on the Accept button to complete the download process ArbConnection 4 The Command Editor Th mman The Command Editor is an excellent tool for learning low level e Co and programming of the 8102 Invoke the Command Editor from the Editor System menu at the top of the screen Dialog box as shown in Figure 4 42 will pop up If you press the Download button the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument x r Command Editor Command Add Errors quey Iv vol 5 freq 10 786 P Download Response Remove Line m History Buffer Clear Import Export Download I Figure 4 42 the Command Editor Low level SCPI commands and queries can be directly sent to the 8102 from the Command field and the instrument will respond to queries in the Response field The command editor is very useful while developing your own application Build your co
274. of bytes to follow The generator accepts binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform For example 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000 points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 5 29 8101 8102 User Manual low byte binary high byte ASCII digit binary ASCII digit AE S Start of Data Block Number of to Follow 2 Byts Per Byte Count Data Point 2 x Number of Figure 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary_block gt Represents waveform data The waveform data is made of 16 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 16 bit words and rearranged as two 8 bit words before it can be used by the 8102 as waveform data points The following description shows you how to prepare the data for downloading to the 8102 There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Each channel has its own waveform
275. of the arbitrary modulating waveform value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM MARKer lt frequency gt Description This function programs marker frequency position FM marker can be placed inside the following range carrier frequency deviation frequency 2 The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the marker frequency position in units of 100e6 Hz Response The 8102 will return the present marker frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned 5 40 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands AM modulation Use the following command for programming the AM parameters P AM control is internal The commands for programming the rogramming amplitude modulation function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes AM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP Description This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the
276. ol Data button in the PSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base phase and shifted phase It contains a list of 0 and 1 and the output will repeatedly follow the phase shift keying sequence in the same order as programmed 0 1 Phase In PSK the carrier waveform CW has two phase settings an initial phase which is set by the 0 Phase parameter and shifted phase which is set by the 1 Phase The control data table has a list of 0 and 1 values that flag when the phase shifts from base to shifted phase Baud The baud parameter sets the rate of which the generator steps through the sequence of the PSK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker setting programs a specific step index in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the PSK marker output To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the TI H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading 4 21 8101 8102 User Manual The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panels 4 22 Period The Pulse Generator panel contains controls tha
277. on 2 0 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER MODulation PULSe FIX SHAPe SiNusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 TRlangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 SQUare DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 PULSe DELay 0 to 99 999 10 WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 5 8 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default Standard Waveforms Commands TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 DAMP DELay 0 to 99 99 0 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 99 60 TRAiling 0 to 99 99 30 SINC NCYCle 4 to 100 10 GAUSsian EXPonent 10 to 200 20 EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 1 DC AMPLitude 8 to 8 5 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands TRACe DATA lt data_array gt DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1 2 e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 DELete NAME 1 to 10k ALL SELect 1 to 10k 1 SEGMent DATA lt data_array gt Modulated Waveforms Commands SOURCce MODulation TYPE OFF FM AM SWE FSK ASK FHOPping AHOPping OFF 3D PSK QAM CARRier FREQuency 10 to 100e6 1e6 BASeline CARRier DC CARR LOAD DEMO 5 9 8101 8102
278. onnected like a staircase In reality the 8102 generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but if the waveform has many horizontal points the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical Amplitude axis therefore the left side of your equation will always look as Amplitude p where p is the equation variables in units of waveform points You can write equations with up to 256 characters If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Equation The following paragraphs describe the conventions that are used for writing an equation To avoid errors it is extremely important Convention that you make yourself familiar with these conventions before you plan your waveforms Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation You may only enter the right part of the equation The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting Case is not important and spaces are ignored Numbers are entered in scientific notation All calculations are done with double digit precision For the trigonometric functions all angles are expressed in radians A number of constants are provided e which is the base of the natural logarithm pi which is the
279. onse Amplifier In Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Square Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Q 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0 1V Adjustment 5 Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6 Adjust C1073 for best pulse response 4ns type 5 aberrations Flatness The flatness adjustments assure that the flatness of the amplifier is within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the Adjustments flatness is an issue Setup 41 1MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1MHz Ch2 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjustthe Fine Amplitude of the Oscilloscope to getthe signal of 6 divisions on the screen 7 45 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 42 Setup 43 Setup 44 7 46 10MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV
280. ontrol When in BUS the hardware inputs are ignored and only remote commands can trigger the instrument The MIX is a special trigger advance mode that senses the first remote trigger and only then enables the hardware sources There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode Source defines the trigger source EXT enables the rear panel trigger input BUS enables remote commands and MIX enables remote command and after the first trigger enables the EXT source Slope defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Level sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector Signal transition to above the trigger level will trigger the instrument When the slope is set to negative transitions to below the trigger level will trigger the instrument Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input 3 21 8101 8102 User Manual Burst Defines the number of cycles the generator will output after a trigger signal Each channel can be programmed to have a unique burst counter Trigger Delay defines the state of the delayed trigger function Re Trigger defines the state of the re trigger function You may use the counted burst mode in conjunction with standard arbitrary and modulated waveforms only The Burst run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 11 Source ie Slope POS Triggered Re Trigger Trigger Delay State OFF State OFF
281. ontrol some general system parameters and provides access to the calibration There are two panels in this group General System which provides access to some system commands utilities and filters and Calibration which provides access to the calibration remote calibration utility Note however that access to the n calibration panel is permitted to qualified service persons and requires special user name and password Information how to access the calibration panel is given in Chapter 7 General Filters The System Panels The System set of panels are shown in Figure 4 13a Each of the Calibration panels is described below Figure 4 13a the System Panels General Filters The General Filters panel provides access to some general system common Commande allows read back of information that is stored in the flash and provides means of adding filters to the output path The General Filters panel and the various parameters that control these functions are described below Serial Nurnber Figure 4 13 the General Filters Panel System The System group has three buttons that are normally associated with system control These are 4 23 8101 8102 User Manual Calibration 4 24 Reset generates soft reset to the instrument controls and dialog boxes and modifies all parameters to factory default A list of factory defaults is given in Chapter 5 Query Error queries the 8102 for programming errors This command is
282. ord Parameter Form Default System Commands continued CLS ESE 1 to 255 OPC RST SRE 1 to 255 TRG ESR IDN OPT STB 9 8101 8102 User Manual Instrument This group is used to control output channels and their respective Control state amplitude and offset settings as well as the waveform mode You can also set the phase offset between channels and select Commands filters to re structure the shape of your waveform Multiple instruments can be synchronized with these commands as well The output frequency and the reference source are also selected using commands from this group Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 2 Instrument Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default OUTPut LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 SYNC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 POSition 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2e6 1 with option 2 0 SOURce 1 2 1 FiLTer LPASs NONE 25M 50M 60M 120M NONE SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal INT FREQuency CW 10e 3 to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 RASTer 1 5 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e7 VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 16e 3 to 16 MINimum MAXimum 5 OFFSet 7 992 to 7 992 0 PHASe OFFSet
283. ors Each channel has its own set of offset generators and therefore the accuracy is tested on each channel separately Offset path is checked for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Offset Accuracy Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 20 mV Output On Offset As specified in Table 6 6 Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 6 Table 6 Offset Accuracy DAC Output 8102 Offset DMM Reading Setting Error Limits 7800V 7 800v 88myv 4000V 4 000 V s45my TI oov vum TI 4 000V 4 000v 45mv d 7800V 7800v 88mv ____ 6 7 8101 8102 User Manual Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 6V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 7 Table 7 Offset Accuracy DDS Output 8102 Offset DMM Reading Setting Error Limits
284. ory defaults Exponential Wave The exponential pulse waveform is useful in applications simulating capacitor charge or discharge Not being a true pulse generator the exponential pulse parameters are re computed every time a parameter is changed 1000 points are allocated for the exponential pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being 3 31 8101 8102 User Manual 3 32 reduced automatically The exponential pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape As the number of points decrease further the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore There are certain menus that provide access to sinc pulse waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the sinc waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the
285. ost equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 8102 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure Warm up Period 7 3 8101 8102 User Manual Recommended Test Equipment Recommended equipment for adjustments is listed in Table 7 1 Instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required minimal characteristics Also listed below are accessories required for calibration Table 7 1 Recommended calibration for Adjustments Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter package LC684 LeCroy Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Frequency Counter Rubidium reference 6020R Tabor Electronics Function Generator with manual trigger 8020 Tabor Electronics Accessories BNC to BNC cables 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Adjustment Procedures 7 4 Use the following procedures to calibrate the Model 8102 The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration and what the acceptable calibration limits are Calibration is done with the covers closed and the 8102 connected through an interface to a host computer Any interface can be used from the following USB LAN or GPIB Calibration requires that ArbConnection utility be installed and int
286. pe Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 50 us Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Reset Waveform Modulated Modulation PSK Carrier Freq 10 kHz Shift Phase 180 degrees Baud Rate 10 kHz Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step PSK list with alternating O and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify PSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sinewave Period 0 1 ms Phase Every 0 1 ms change 180 degrees Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 25 8101 8102 User Manual Sweep Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 8102 cont
287. pe function generator Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base Sampling Rate Trace A View Trigger source Amplitude 0 2 ms 50 MS s at least Jitter Type FREQ CLK Channel 2 positive slope 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency Run Mode Waveform Amplitude Offset 1 kHz Continuous Squarewave 2V 1V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulation Modulated FM Mod Run Mode Gated Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz 6 21 8101 8102 User Manual Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Gated FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Gated sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Gated Period 1ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Re triggered FM Equipment Oscilloscope Bursts Standard Preparation Waveforms 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Chan
288. ple Typical Arbitrary Waveforms Panel 1 21 1 11 Typical Modulated waveform Display 1 21 1 12 ArbConnection Example FM Modulation Panel 1 22 1 13 8102 Digital Pulse Generator Menu Exvample 1 24 1 14 ArbConnection Digital Pulse Generator Panel Example ssssssssensesssnrrrnresserrrrrnnnrsssrrrnne 1 24 E Bleu Ee te 2 8 Ss eee ee ens ge ee ea es Oe Soe oe at dance 2 9 2 3 USB Device Detecta tiren 2 10 2 4 Found New Hardware Wizard ooccccccooncnccccnncnnncnnnccncnonanonononnncnnnnnonononnnnonnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnns 2 10 2 5 Choose Your Search and installation Options sseseeesseeeeeeeeeeeettttrtttrttttttrtrtrrttrttttrrrenna 2 11 2 6 Windows Logo Warning Message ENNEN 2 11 2 7 New Hardware Found and Software Imstalled 2 12 xi List of Figures continued 2 8 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port 2 12 2 9 Choose Your Search and installation Options sesseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeetttttttttttttrrtrrrtttrrrtrrrrrnna 2 13 2 11 New Hardware Found and Software Imnstalled 2 14 2 12 Model 8102 Configured for USB Operation 2 15 2 13 LAN Configuration O EE 2 16 3 1 Reset 8102 to Factory ET 3 5 2 8102 Front Panel Oper avon asis adas 3 6 3 3 Enabling and Disabling the Outputs kee 3 11 3 4 Selecting an Output Waveform TYPE ennet 3 12 3 5 Modifying Output Frequency dos 3 13 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Frequency uk 3 14 3 7 Programming Amplitude and Offset kee 3 16 3 8 Run Mode Options al id
289. plicated and complex waveforms If you remember from your old high school studies the simplest curve of Y as a function of X is defined by the equation Y aX b You can use the same technique to generate straight lines with the Equation Editor Assuming first that p 0 try this Amplitude p 1000 Press Preview and see what you get Of course you get an uninteresting line that runs parallel to the X axis Now lets give the line some angle by typing Amplitude p 2 p 2000 Press Preview and see that the line slopes down lt may still be not very interesting however pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation You cannot type Amplitude p 2p 1000 like you would normally do in your notebook You must use the multiply sign otherwise you ll get a syntax error Now we ll try to generate a simple sine waveform Try this Amplitude p sin 10 Press Preview and sorry you still get nothing on the screen The Wave Composer did not make a mistake The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows You are unable to see the result because the line on your screen running across the 0 vertical point p REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting Now try this Amplitude p sin omg p Still no good but now press the Adjust button and here is your sinewave So what s wrong Well if you ll gi
290. posers Detailed virtual front panels control all 8102 functions and modes Wave composer generates edits and downloads complex waveforms Easy on screen generation of complex pulses using the pulse composer Equation editor generates waveforms from equations SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation Translates waveform coordinates from ASCII and other formats Various screens of the ArbConnection program are shown in Figures 1 2 through 1 4 Getting Started ArbConnection Feature Highlights File Edit Yiew Wave Download About Dw SCH z A Sn ame EI bai S Sg Wevelenath 3000 Activesea 1 pay MS jou op R Anchor 2999 Equation Editor E xl r Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts fo Max 82767 Cycles C Manual Scale End pts 2939 Min 32768 fi Ze Auto r Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands E 8000 sinfomg p 10 e p 250 OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 3e3Pts 300Pts Div Figure 1 3 ArbConnection The Wave Composer q 1 5 8101 8102 User Manual 1 6 iol x Vertical Scale AN 0 5W Div Horizontal Scale 4155ms 415 5ms Div lt 7 F Ton CH2 Current i View Full Train e Section Structure J Pulse Train Design Format Time Cumulative DC Intervals 100 100 Time Level Points HE D 500 600
291. pplicable Table 5 5 Modulated Waveforms Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default SOURce MODulation TYPE OFF FM AM SWEep FSK ASK PSK OFF CARRier FREQuency 10 to 100e6 1e6 BASeline CARRier DC CARR LOAD DEMO Frequency Modulation Commands FM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 100e6 100e3 FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 100e6 1e6 DATA lt data_array gt Amplitude Modulation Commands ANM FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN MODulation FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 10e3 DEPTh 0 to 100 50 Sweep Modulation Commands SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 100 0e6 10e3 STOP 10 to 100e6 166 TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 DIRection UP DOWN UP SPACing LlNear LOGarithmic LIN MARKer FREQuency 10 to 100e6 505 e3 5 35 8101 8102 User Manual Table 55 5 Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default SOURce Frequency Shift Keying Modulation Commands FSK FREQuency SHIFted 10e 3 to 100e6 100e3 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 MARKer 1 to 4000 1 DATA lt data_array gt SOURce PSK PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 SHIFted 0 to 360 180 RATE 1 to 10e6 1063 DATA lt data_array gt MARKer 1 to 4000 1 BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 CARRier STATe OFF ON O0 1 1 5 3
292. procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed Read the procedures and heed warnings to avoid live circuits points Before operation this instrument 1 Ensure the instrument is configured to operate on the voltage at the power source See Installation Section 2 Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate 3 Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to this instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third wire earth ground If the instrument fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do not operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Tabor Electronics Ltd 9 Hatasia Street Tel Hanan ISRAEL 36888 declare that the 100MHz Arbitrary Function Generators Models 8101 and 8102 complies with the requirements of the Electro Magnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC 92 263 EEC and 93 97 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC according to testing performed at ORDOS E M TEST LABs 5TBR964CX Oct 2005 Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official Journal of the European Communities Safety IEC EN 61010 1 2 Edition 2001 C1 C2 EMC EN55022 2001 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emission
293. ption Use this command to attach size to a specific memory segment The final size of the arbitrary memory is 512k points The memory can be partitioned to smaller segments up to 10k segments This function allows definition of segment size Total length of memory segments cannot exceed the size of the waveform memory NOTE The 8102 operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data Therefore segment size can be programmed in numbers evenly divisible by four only For example 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block 2002 is not a multiple of 4 therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the segment number of which will be number gt integer only programmed using this command lt length gt 16 to Numeric Programs the size of the selected segment Minimum 1 2 M integer only segment length is 16 points the maximum is limited by 512k 5 31 8101 8102 User Manual TRACe DELete lt segment_number gt Description This command will delete a segment The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform will be equal or smaller in size to the deleted segment If the deleted segment is the last segment then the size of another waveform written to the same segment is not limited For example let consider two segments the
294. r 8102 and observe that the progress bar as shown in Figure 7 5 is advancing from left to right Do not do anything on the 8102 until the progress bar completes its travel to the right end Y Tips If the progress bar is not moving check the following for possible problems 1 If you are connecting to a LAN network make sure your device is connected with standard LAN wire to your wall plug 2 If you use direct connection from your PC to the 8102 your cable should be cross wired You can get such cable from any computer store near your area 3 If your network is using a managed switch it is possible that it is configure to break the package with broadcast address and therefore the only way to use NetConfig is to connect the instrument directly to the PC with a cross wired cable 7 51 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF eet ke SFA omg FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Fon cH2 foureut sync gt a o a A TABOR ELECTRONICS Ltd The morare Y Oe im v Y Starting up MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG e HE som a E ey ey ra f A f A son TL 50n J Figure 7 5 Check for Progress Bar Movement 5 As soon as the progress bar reached the far right hand of the bar click on the Refresh button If your device was connected and booted correctly the device address will appear in the device list as shown in Figure 7 6 TE NETConfig Run ia Ps Ja JE
295. r creating and editing pulses without the need to think about sample clock number of points and complex equations Pulses are created on the screen simply and efficiently in a special dialog box by typing in the width and level or by using the rubber band method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude and time duration The pulse composer can also multiply pulse sections to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals To launch the pulse composer point and click on the Pulse tab in the Panels bar Figure 4 28 shows an example of the pulse composer The Pulse Composer has three main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 28 throughout the description of these sections The Pulse Composer The commands bar provides access to standard Windows Commands bar commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Pulse Composer The various Commande in the Commande bar are listed and described below 4 45 8101 8102 User Manual File Commands 4 46 Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 75 2ms 7 52ms Div o
296. r implied either in fact or by operation of law statutory or oth erwise PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the technical data herein disclosed are proprietary to Tabor Electronics and shall not without express written permission of Tabor Electronics be used in whole or in part to solicit quotations from a competitive source or used for manufacture by anyone other than Tabor Electronics The information herein has been developed at private expense and may only be used for operation and maintenance reference purposes or for purposes of engineering evaluation and incorporation into technical specifications and other documents which specify procurement of products from Tabor Elec tronics FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting maintenance or exploratory procedure read care fully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices This equipment contains voltage hazardous to human life and safety and is capable of in flicting personal injury If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line mains through an autotransformer ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral earth pole of the power supply Before operating the unit ensure the conductor green wire is connected to the ground earth conductor of the power outlet Do not use a two conductor extension cord or a three prong two prong adapter This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the power cord Maintenance and calibration
297. r or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register Bit 6 Decimal value 64 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS Bit This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service The MSS bit is not part of the IEEE STD 488 1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll However the RQS bit if set will be sent in response to a serial poll Bit 7 Decimal value 128 Not used always set to 0 The Status Byte summary register can be read with the STB common query The STB common query causes the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status Summary message as a single lt NR1 Numeric Response Message gt element The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register The STB common query does not alter the status byte Removing the reasons for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register Sending the CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages With the output queue empty the MAV summary message is set to FALSE Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs oc O 2 a O fe Remote Programming Refere
298. rameter in units of 99 99 percent Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value RAMP TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command programs ramp transition from high to low of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to Numeric 30 Programs the ramp fall time parameter in units of 99 99 percent Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value 5 25 8101 8102 User Manual SINC NCYCleN_cycles gt Description This command programs the number of 0 crossings of the standard SINC pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt N_cycle gt 4to 100 Numeric 10 Programs the number of zero crossings parameter Integer only Response The 8102 will return the present number of zero crossing value GAUSsian EXPonent lt exp gt Description This command programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 4to 100 Numeric 20 Programs the exponent parameter Response The 8102 will return the present exponent value EXPonential EXPonent lt exp gt Description This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms
299. rator accepts OFF or 0 for a false condition The generator accepts ON or 1 for a true condition The instrument always returns 0 or 1 when a boolean setting is queried The following command uses a boolean parameter OUTP FILT OFF ON The same command can also be written as follows OUTP FILT 0 1 Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the generator s memory Depending on which option is installed the Model 8102 can accept binary blocks up to 512k bytes The following command uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary data TRAC DATA 564000 lt binary_block gt Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Binary Block Binary block parameters are used for loading segment into the Parameters generator s memory Information on the binary block parameters is SCPI Syntax and Styles given later in this manual Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the KEYWORD the PARAMETER FORM and any NOTES The KEYWORD column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 8102 will process the comm
300. re the accuracy is tested on each channel separately Amplitude path is checked for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude As specified in Table 6 4 Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 4 Table 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output 8102 Amplitude DMM Reading Setting Error Limits CH 2 16 00 V 5 657 V 113 mV 10 00 V 3 535 V 59 mV 1 000 V 353 5 mV 7 mV 100 0 mV 35 35 mV 2 1 mV Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude As specified in Table 6 5 Test Procedure 6 6 Performance Checks Test Procedures 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 5 Table 5 Amplitude Accuracy DDS output 8102 Amplitude 1 000 V 353 5 mV 7 mV 100 0 mV 35 35 mV 2 1 mV Offset accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the offset generat
301. re when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Delay sets the delay time for the ramp start The delay is programmed as percent of the ramp period Rise programs the ramp rise time The rise time is programmed as percent of the ramp period Fall programs the ramp fall time The fall time is programmed as percent of the ramp period Note that the sum of the delay rise high and fall times cannot exceed 100 If the sum is less than 100 the end of the pulse will remain at a dc level to the completion of the period 3 29 8101 8102 User Manual 3 30 Reset Parameters Resets the pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults Sinc Wave The sinc pulse sine x x waveform
302. re displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the 10 11 12 Getting Started 1 Functional Description parameters Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2 When the 8102 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 8102 Cursor UP Down Left and Right Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector
303. rence is recommended if you intend to utilize the full resolution provided by the instrument Output amplitude for each of the channels may be programmed separately from 32 mV to 32 Vp p into an open circuit and 16 mV to 16 V into 50 Amplitude and offsets are completely independent to each other and can be programmed with 4 digits of resolution as long as the 8 V and the 8 V rail limitations double into open circuit are not exceeded The amplitude display is calibrated to the load source which is normally 50 Q In cases where the load difference is different you can customize the instrument to display the correct amplitude reading that matches your load impedance Besides its normal continuous mode the Model 8102 responds to a variety of trigger sources The output waveform may be gated triggered or may generate a counted burst of waveforms A built in re trigger generator with a programmable period can be used as a replacement of an external trigger source Triggers can be delayed to a specific interval by a built in trigger delay generator that has a range of 200ns to over 20 seconds The arbitrary waveform memory is comprised of a bank of 16 bit words Each word represents a point on the horizontal waveform scale Each word has a horizontal address that can range from 0 to 512k and a vertical address that can range from 32767 to 32768 16 bits Using a high speed clocking circuit the digital contents of the arbitrary wavefor
304. requencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform 5 42 Remote Programming Reference 5 Modulated Waveforms Control Commands frequency range Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt stop_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sweep stop frequency Sweep stop is 100e6 programmed in units of Hz Response The 8102 will return the present sweep stop frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep TIMe lt time gt Description This specifies the time that will take the 8102 to sweep from start to stop frequencies The time does not depend on the sweep boundaries as it is automatically adjusted by the software to the required interval At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform maintains the sweep stop frequency setting except if the 8102 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 1 4e 6 Numeric le 3 Programs the sweep time Sweep time is to 40 programmed in units of s Response The 8102 will return the present sweep time The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100ms would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned SWEep DIRection UP DOWNK Description This specifies if the 8102 output will sweep from start to stop UP
305. ress Enter to edit the Divider value 4 Use the arrow keys or the dial to modify the edited parameter 5 Press Enter to lock in the value The 8102 run modes are shared by all waveform type Standard Arbitrary and Modulated However when in modulation function run mode options take different meaning When in triggered burst or gated run modes the 8102 outputs sine carrier waveform CW until a valid trigger is received and then reacts to the trigger If triggers cease to stimulate the input the output resumes generating CW frequency only Carrier frequency is common to all modulation functions and can be programmed from the modulation menus If the above behavior is not desired the 8102 can be programmed to output dc level when idle generate the modulated signal when triggered and then resume dc level position when the modulation cycle has ended The baseline option is programmable from either the front panel or from remote In Triggered mode the output remains at a DC level as long as a valid trigger signal has not occurred Each time a trigger occurs the 8102 generates one complete output waveform At the end of the output cycle the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform The instrument may be triggered from one of the following sources A rear panel input designated as TRIG IN front panel button marked MAN TRIG and a remote command such as TRG When placed in EXT e
306. ription This selects the source from where the 8102 will be stimulated to generate waveforms The source advance command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init cont off command Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Activates the rear panel TRIG IN input and the front panel MAN TRIG button Either a front panel button push or a legal signal which will be applied to the rear panel input will stimulate the 8102 to generate waveforms BUS commands are ignored BUS Discrete Selects the remote controller as the trigger source Only software commands are accepted while rear and front panel signals are ignored MIXed Discrete Hardware triggers are ignored until First output cycle is initiated using a software command Subsequent output cycles are initiated using one of the following rear panel TRIG IN or front panel MAN TRIG button Response The 8102 will return EXT BUS or MIX depending on the selected trigger source advance setting TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Description The trigger slope command selects the sensitive edge of the trigger signal that is applied to the TRIG IN 5 53 8101 8102 User Manual connector The Model 8102 can be made sensitive to either the positive or negative transitions Positive going transitions will trigger the generator when the POS option is selected Negat
307. rogrammed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt high gt O to 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Will set the width of the high time for the pulse shape in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the high time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 8102 will return the present high time value in units of seconds AUXiliary PULse LEVel HIGH lt high gt Description This command will program the high level for the pulse shape Note that the same level is retained for the second pulse in the double pulse mode 5 57 8101 8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt high gt 7 992 to 8 Numeric 5 Will set the pulse high level in units of volts Note that the high level setting must be higher than the low level setting Also note that high to low level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV Response The 8102 will return the present low level value in unit of volts AUXiliary PULse LEVel LOW lt low gt Description This command will program the phase offset between two adjacent instruments Normally this command should be used on the slave unit The phase offset control provides means of generating multiple signals with phase offset between them Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt low gt 8 to 7 992 Numeric 0 Will
308. rograms pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Description This command programs pulse transition from high to low of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse fall time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value 5 24 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands RAMP DELay lt delay gt Description This command programs delay of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the ramp delay parameter in units of 99 99 percent Response The 8102 will return the present ramp delay value Ramp TRANsition lt rise gt Description This command programs ramp transition from low to high of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to Numeric 60 Programs the pulse rise time pa
309. rols on both channels as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Sweep Start Frequency 1 MHz Stop Frequency 2 MHz Sweep Time 1 ms Sweep Type Linear Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Sweep operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramp up Frequency 1 kHz Max A 2 MHz Min A 1 MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Move 8102 sweep marker position to 1 5 MHz and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp Test Results Pass Fail 3 Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify oscilloscope reading as before except the ramp is down Test Results Pass Fail 6 26 Performance Checks Test Procedures 4 Change sweep step to logarithmic and verify oscilloscope exponential down waveform with properties as in 3 above Test Results Pass Fail 5 Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 6 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output This tests the operation of the SYNC output There are two ti parameters being tested the qualifier and the sync source The sync operation output has a fixed TTL level amplitude into an open circuit SYNC Qualifier Bit Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv 2 Connect 8102 SYNC output to the oscillo
310. rom the Edit menu make sure that the section you want to remove is currently the active section Remove all Sections The Remove all Sections command lets you remove the entire pulse design from the pulse screen and start from a fresh page Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation This command is extremely useful in cases where you unintentionally delete a section from the pulse train and want to restore it to the screen 4 47 8101 8102 User Manual View Commands 4 48 W Pulse Editor Section 2 lt Points gt 3 xi ei Section Structure Laval Time Cumulative eve interval Time 0 0 D The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the pulse area The View commands include Pulse Editor Full Train or individual Sections Channel 1 and 2 screens and Options Description of the view commands is given in the following Pulse Editor The view Pulse Editor command invokes a dialog box as shown in Figure 4 29 In general the pulse editor is used for placing straight line segments on the screen in intervals that define pulse width rise fall times and amplitude Information how to use the pulse editor to create pulse trains is given later in this chapter Full Train The view Full Train shows on the pulse screen all sections of the pulse train Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected wil
311. rrier waveform CW The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform normally referred to as modulating waveform The shape of the modulating waveform can be selected from sine triangle square or arbitrary waveforms Carrier waveforms are programmed with 10 digits resolution from 10 mHz to 100 MHz The FM function has a number of menus that control the modulation parameters These are shown in Figure 3 20 and described in the following paragraphs Modulation Shape Defines the shape and type of the modulating waveform Although there are 5 options shown in the menu there is a significant difference between the first four Sine Triangle Square and Ramp and the last option Arbitrary The first four modulating waveforms are described in this section whereas the arbitrary FM being part of the modulation package options is described separately in the relevant section of this chapter The Modulation Shape menu that provides access to the selection of the envelop waveform is shown in Figure 3 21 CW Frequency defines the frequency of the carrier waveform Using this standard FM function the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine Frequency Deviation defines the range of frequencies of which the modulation will go through The peak value is symmetrical around the value of the carrier waveform frequency Modulation Frequency defines the frequency of the modulating waveform The
312. rs Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Will set the frequency of the standard waveform in 100e6 units of Hz Although the display resolution for the frequency setting is 9 digits only the frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits The accuracy of the instrument however can only be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability lt MINimum gt Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to the lowest possible frequency 10e 3 lt MAXimum Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to gt the highest possible frequency 100e6 5 17 8101 8102 User Manual Response The 8102 will return the present frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FREQuency RASTer lt sclk gt MINimum MAXimum Description This command modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second S s It has no affect on standard waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sclk gt 1 5 to Numeric 1e7 Will set the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary 250e6 waveform in units of S s Although the display resolution for the frequency setting is 9 digits only the frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits The accuracy of the in
313. s Marker defines an index point in the FSK sequence where the SYNC output will generate a marker pulse Trigger Baseline defines the idle state of the FSK output when placed in trigger mode There are two options continuous carrier or dc level The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered generates the FSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform Selecting dc the output generates dc level until triggered Generates the FSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Offset defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another FSK Control Data String ShiftData Append al Insert Delete Clear All Import Export d gt Data Note Save Shift data is construed from 0 and 1 Download O Carrier frequency 1 Shift frequency lx D sch CH CH CH eh CH m CH sch br Close Figure 22 FSK Control Data String Example 3 43 8101 8102 User Manual Modulation Type Shifted Frequency BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC MOD POS 6 CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON Figure 23 FSK Menus PSK 3 44 PSK Phase Shift keying modulation allows ph
314. s evel 4 2 D b 0 3 2 0 0 5 1 0 7 1 0 9 1 1 1 1 5 2 5 3 2 4 2 5 1 6 1 7 2 8 2 m Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 42 8 ms Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo 9 5 12 Duration x AJ 35 2 ms 13 Figure 4 40 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example Downloading the Pulse Train Congratulations for coming this far If you followed the above description how to build this pulse example the screen should look exactly as shown in Figures 4 37 and 4 40 If you are happy with the results the next step is to download what you see on the pulse composer screen to the generator One more step before you download the waveform to the instrument is to check the Pulse Train Download Summary as appears after you press the Download icon You can also view the same information if you select it from the View menu Refer to Figure 4 41 for information how to interpret your download summary 4 61 8101 8102 User Manual Download Summary r Memory Menagement Mode of Operation Populated segment s 1 Waveforms mode Arbitrary Memory usage pts 1600 F t Setti x J Instrument Settings Select from the menu View gt gt Options Amplitude DI 8 000 Check this box if you do not wish to Offset MI 1 000 show it again E Reject Sample clock GJ 20e3 Figure 4 41 the Pulse Editor Download Summary Interpret
315. s cuisine 3 57 3 34 Reading the 8102 Internal Temperature 3 58 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options ct na 4 5 4 2 ArbConnection S Toolbars ooonccccnconcnnnnononcnononononcnnnononcnnnnonannnnnonnnrnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnonanrnenanannnnns 4 5 4 24 Me Panels Toolbar nnnm A a fal Mae toed Ae A aS 4 6 LP ii 4 9 4 3a the Operation Panel Sacando 4 8 4 4 the Standard Waveforms Panel 4 10 45 Me ele Panel cto 4 12 4 6 the Memory Partition Table ur 4 14 4 7 the Trigger PA EN A EE 4 15 4 8 te FEM Panelas nenn n a a a Ane Naa ee o 4 17 4 8a the Modulation Panel 4 16 AQ thesAM le EE 4 18 4 10 the Sweep Modulation Panel 4 19 4 11 the FSK PSK Modulation Panel 4 20 4 12 the Digital Pulse Generator Panel ion bl 4 22 4 13 the General Filters Panel 4 23 4 13athe System EE 4 23 4 14 ho Utility Pal a e E A E REA REEE 4 25 4 15 the Wave Composer Opening Gcreen ENNEN 4 26 4 15a the Composers Panels ion a ad laca 4 25 4 16 the Open Waveform Dialog Box AAA 4 28 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform Segments iii EE EEN Ee ee 4 30 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built in Library ooooocccnnnnncncccccnnnnnannccnancccninnnos 4 32 xiii List of Figures continued 4 19 the Toolbar ICONS sasaa ana aa a a r a a a 4 32 4 20 the WaVe elen Een dicos 4 33 4 21 the Equation Editor Dialog Box 03 ooo a iras 4 34 4 22 an Equation Editor Ee E 4 39 4 23 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms ooocconocccccnnc
316. sactedadennetdeadens 3 50 Pulse Design Ee Ee EE 3 52 Understanding the Basics of Phase Offset between Channels cccccccccccccccccccncncns 3 53 Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard Waveforms cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 54 Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary WaveformS seesessesseeeseeeesseeeseesseseeeeeseeeeeeeee 3 56 Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated VWaveiorms 3 56 Customizing the Output Units Loa do 3 56 Selecting the Horizontal Units cccccceceeeee eee eeeee eee tee eee cena asec eneeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeees 3 56 Adjusting Load Impedance loner ate nus teen ae 3 57 Monitoring the Internal Temperature 22 20 c eccceeseeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeentseeececeneaeeneees 3 57 3 2 Overview Inter Channel Dependency Inter Channel Phase Dependency Output Termination Using the Instrument 3 Overview This chapter contains information about how to operate the Tabor 8102 Operation is divided into two general categories basic bench operation and remote operation GPIB USB and ENET Basic bench operation which is covered in this section describes how to operate the arbitrary waveform generator using front panel sequences The 8102 is supplied with ArbConnection a PC based software package with a graphical user interface to allow users to program all of the functions directly LabView drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available for more experienced programmers
317. scilloscope input Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Q 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0 1V Adjustment 5 Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6 Adjust C1036 for best pulse response 4ns type 5 aberrations The flatness adjustments assure that the flatness of the amplifier is within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the flatness is an issue Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 41 1MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust the Fine Amplitude of the Oscilloscope to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 42 10MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 10MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustmen
318. scope input 3 Configure model 8102 as follows Ch1 Waveform Sine Ch1 Output On SYNC On Test Procedure 1 Verify trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulses at 1 us intervals Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Source Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv Trigger Source Channel 1 6 27 8101 8102 User Manual Connect 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect 8102 CH1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Connect 8102 CH2 output to the oscilloscope input channel 3 Configure model 8102 channel 1 and 2 controls as follows Function Arbitrary Output On SYNC On 6 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Chi 64 points sine waveform Ch2 100 points sine waveform ALL Test Procedure 1 Verify that the trace on the oscilloscope is synchronized with the 8102 channel 1 waveform Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify the 8102 SYNC Source from channel 1 to channel 2 3 Verify that the trace on the oscilloscope is synchronized with the 8102 channel 2 waveform Test Results Pass Fail 6 28 Performance Checks Test Procedures This tests the integrity of the waveform memory The waveform Waveform Memory memory stores the waveforms that are being ge
319. screen with the Channel 1 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 Channel 2 The Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform for Channel 2 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen The Wave command has a library of 8 waveforms Sine Sawtooth Square Sinc Gaussian Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave command Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 18 will appear You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust i
320. secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator will return its serial number in a format similar to the following 000000451 10 characters maximum 5 62 Auxiliary Commands Remote Programming Reference 5 SYSTem IP lt ip_adrs gt Description This command programs the IP address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt ip_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the IP address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current IP address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following 192 168 0 6 SYSTem IP MASK lt mask_adrs gt Description This command programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt mask_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current subnet mask address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following 255 255 255 0 SYSTem IP BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 Description Use this command to toggle BOOTP mode on and off Parameters Range Type
321. segments that you already used previously for the arbitrary function however this is the recommended option for the program and for the example we are going to build later Pulse Transition management The pulse transition management parameter defines for the program how many waveform points will be used to step from one amplitude level to another amplitude level The longer the transition time the program will need more steps to smooth the transition If you select the limit increments and set a pre defined number of increments you manually control how many waveform points will be dedicated for transitions however if you are not sure what is the optimum number of increments select the allow system control option for the program to make the transitions efficient in terms of memory usage and slope smoothness After you complete setting the pulse editor options point and click on OK Using the Pulse Editor The prime tool for building pulse patterns on the pulse composer screen is the pulse editor To invoke the pulse editor point and click on the pulse editor icon on the tools bar The editor as shown in Figure 4 51 will show Refer to this figure for the following descriptions 4 53 8101 8102 User Manual 4 54 101xi H ES fFul tran Sy Z c op Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals DC Intervals Sa Time Level Points Points Time Level Points E Delete All i Undo i T Section Properties
322. ser Manual IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries oooccioncccnnoniconoccnnonancnancnnnnonnrnnnncnno nono 5 66 The SCPI Status Registers AANEREN 5 67 The Status Byte Register S Tio 5 67 Reading the Status Byte Register a cccccccesesssessesssesteseseseetessseetesessseetensseeeenes 5 68 Clearing the Status Byte eebe tdi dirt dio 5 68 Service Request Enable Register GPP 5 70 Standard Event Status Register ES 5 70 Standard Event Status Enable Register EE 5 71 Error Messages cid o aan 5 72 5 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction to SCPI Remote Programming Reference What s in This Chapter This Chapter lists and describes the set of SCPI compatible Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments remote commands used to operate the 8102 To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt with in a similar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described Complete listing of all commands used for programming the 8102 is given in Table 5 1 Commands to program the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993 0 standard The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol It goes one step further than IEEE STD 488 2 and defines a standard set of comm
323. set the pulse low level in units of volts Note that the low level setting must be smaller than the high level setting Also note that low to high level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV Response The 8102 will return the present high level value in unit of volts AUXiliary PULse PERiod lt period gt Description This command will program the pulse repetition rate period Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay rise high and fall times must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first before all other pulse parameters Note that by selecting the double pulse mode the pulse period remains unchanged Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt period gt 80e 9 to 1e6 Numeric 10e 3 Will program the period of the pulse waveform in units of seconds Response The 8102 will return the present pulse period value in units of seconds 5 58 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands AUXiliary PULse POLarity NORMal COMPlemented INVerted Description This command will program the polarity of the pulse in reference to the base line level The polarity options are Normal where the pulse is generated exactly as programmed Inverted where the pulse is inverted about the 0 level base line and Complemented where the pulse is inverted about its mid amplitude level Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Dis
324. signated as TRIG IN 2 Front panel button marked as MAN TRIG second function to the Enter button and 3 Bus commands that are applied to the instrument from any interface LAN USB or GPIB Description of the various trigger source options is given in the following paragraphs Summary of trigger options and optional trigger sources are listed in Table 1 2 identifying legal operating modes and listing possible setting conflicts Table 1 1 Run Modes and Trigger Source Options Summary Run Mode Trigger Option Status Continuous External Disabled Bus Active Mixed Disabled Delayed Trigger Active Re Trigger Disabled Output signal is toggled on and off using interface triggers Triggered External Active Bus Active Mixed Active Delayed Trigger Active Re Trigger Active Counted Burst External Active Bus Active Mixed Active Delayed Trigger Active Re Trigger Active Not in conjunction with Re Trigger Not in conjunction with Mixed Gated External Active Bus Active Mixed Disabled Delayed Trigger Active Re Trigger Disabled External Bus Mixed Getting Started 1 Trigger Source When selecting the External trigger source the rear panel TRIG IN connector becomes active and every legal signal that is applied to this input is causing the 8102 to trigger Alternately if an external signal is not available the front panel MAN TRIG button may also be
325. sitivity for the trigger input of the 8102 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal 4 15 8101 8102 User Manual The Modulation Panels gt Operation e Modulation FM AM Sweep FSKIPSK b AL Figure 4 8a the Modulation Panels 4 16 Source The 8102 can accept triggers from a number of sources BUS External or Mixed When the Bus option is selected only bus Commande trigger the instrument The External position is the default trigger option which enables the rear panel trigger input and the front panel manual trigger button The Mixed position disables the rear panel trigger input until a software command is executed the trigger source then reverts to the rear panel trigger input Manual Use this button when an external generator is not available Pressing the Manual button is stimulating the instrument as if an external trigger has been applied Trigger Level Programs the trigger level parameter Depending on the slope setting the 8102 will be stimulated to output waveforms when the trigger level threshold has been crossed The Modulation functions were designed over seven separate panels as shown in Figures 4 8 through 4 11 The panels are invoked by pressing the Modulation header and then one of the modulation panels that appear below it Fi
326. skew term is very important If you set both channels to output square waveforms and then connect these signals to an oscilloscope If you then set the oscilloscope to its fastest time base setting you ll see the two rising edges of the 8102 signals They do not overlap exactly because the instrument has a skew spec of 1 ns Skew is caused as a result of many factors Although the two channels were designed exactly the same small variations in printed circuit board layout or component values are enough to cause skew These factors were known during the design phase and were minimized as practical On the other hand skew can also be generated from external factors that are controlled by the user alone Examples for these factors are variation in cable length and quality as well as non symmetrical end termination Therefore if you want to eliminate skew between channels you have to use exactly the same cable type the same cable length and the same termination on both channels There are times however that you do need to offset phase between channels In that case the 8102 lets you adjust phase offset variations with resolution of one point When you do just keep in mind that the initial skew will escort your programmed phase offset throughout the entire phase offset range 3 53 8101 8102 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard Waveforms 3 54 The 8102 can generate an array of standard waveforms however one should
327. ssian pulse waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the sinc waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about 250kHz when you modify the frequency parameter the output responds with coherent change however at higher frequencies the waveform has to be re computed every time and therefore when you modify the frequency the output wanders until the waveform is being re computed and then restored to full accuracy Amplitude programs the amplitude of the output waveform Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Exponent sets the exponent factor for the gaussian function Changing the default exponent value to a different number requires re calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector Reset Parameters Resets the gaussian pulse wave parameters to their original fact
328. st error stored in the queue is replaced with 350 Queue Overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the generator responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed The RST command does not clear the error queue Use the following command to read the error queue SYSTem ERRor Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 80 characters 102 Syntax error A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below 100 Command error When the generator cannot detect more specific errors this is the generic syntax error used 101 Invalid Character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax found in the command string 103 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator it may return error 100 instead of this error 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than allowed 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters were received for the command One or
329. start phase parameter in units of degrees Triangle phase can be programmable with resolution of 0 05 throughout the entire frequency range of the triangular waveform Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value SQUare DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt Description This command programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty_cycle gt Oto Numeric 50 Programs the square wave duty cycle parameter in 99 99 units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present duty cycle value PULSe DELay lt delay gt Description This command programs delay of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse delay parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 8102 will return the present pulse delay value 5 23 8101 8102 User Manual PULSe WIDth lt pulse_width gt Description This command programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt pulse_width gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 8102 will return the present width value PULSe TRANsition lt rise gt Description This command p
330. stem Control Design Units Time units ms el Level Units v y lg Limit Increments 200 Siess Pulse currently not specified Setting the Pulse Editor Options 4 52 Figure 4 34 Selecting Pulse Editor Options groups are described below Mode of Operation There are two options in the mode of operation group The force pulse train to single segment option is recommended if you are using one pulse section only In this case the pulse waveform will occupy one segment only and the generator will automatically be set to operate in arbitrary mode As shown in Figure 4 34 the pulse editor option dialog box is divided to functional groups Mode of operation Design Units Memory Management and Pulse Transition Management These ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Design Units As you design your pulse pattern it will be easier if you design it using the exact units as you would want to output to your load Select between us ms and s for the pulse intervals and mV or V for the amplitude level Select ms and V for the example we are going to build later Memory management There are two options in the memory management group The do not override loaded segments option will make sure that whatever waveforms you already stored for the arbitrary function will stay intact after you save your pulse waveform The allow pulse design with no limitations option may overwrite memory
331. stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation While you type and store equations they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field Control Buttons There are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box Use the Preview button to preview an image of your equation or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you previewed with your Equation Editor The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates As you probably already know waveforms are made of vertical samples The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the wavelength parameter For example if you have 1024 horizontal points your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous waveform shape however if you zoom in on a waveform line you ll see that the points are c
332. strument however can only be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability lt MINimum gt Discrete Will set the sample clock frequency to the lowest possible frequency 1 5 lt MAXimum Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to gt the highest possible frequency 300e6 Response The 8102 will return the present sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100MHz would be returned as 100e6 positive numbers are unsigned VOLTage lt ampl gt MINimum MAXimum Description This command programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 500 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt ampl gt 16e 3 to Numeric 5 Will set the amplitude of the output waveform in units 16e0 of volts Amplitude setting is always peak to peak Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude does not exceed the specified window lt MINimum gt Discrete Will set the amplitude to the lowest possible level 16mV MAXimum gt Discrete Will set the amplitude to the highest possible level 16V 5 18 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands Response The 8102 will return the present amplitude value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returne
333. t 4 Adjust CAL SETUP74 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 43 20MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 20MHz Ch1 Output On 7 25 8101 8102 User Manual Setup 44 Setup 45 Setup 46 7 26 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP75 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 30MHz Amplitude Equipment 500 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 30MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP76 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen 37 3333333MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through
334. t at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 5V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 59 for DMM reading of 5V 25mV 7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Ch1 Amplitude 20mV Ch1 Offset 7V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 58 for DMM reading of 7V 35mV Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 13 1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Chi Amplitude 2V Ch1 Offset 1V Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 CAL SETUP 62 for DMM reading of 1V 5mV Setup 14 3V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV
335. t is directly connected to earth via the chassis power supply cable A WARNING Do not remove instrument covers when operating the instrument or when the power cord is connected to the mains Any adjustment maintenance and repair of an opened powered on instrument should be avoided as much as possible but when necessary should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved The instrument is supplied with a CD that includes the User Manual ArbConnection and IVI engine and driver The instrument is supplied with a power cord and a CD which contains ArbConnection manual IVI driver and supporting files USB and LAN cables and a service manual are available upon request Instrument specifications are listed in Appendix A These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested Specifications apply under the following conditions output terminated into 50Q after 30 minutes of warm up time and within a temperature range of 20 C to 30 C Specifications outside this range are degraded by 0 1 per C Functional Description Front Panel Connectors and Indicators Main Output Channels 1 and 2 SYNC Output Front Panel Controls Getting Started 1 Functional Description A detailed functional description is given in the following paragraphs The description is divided into logical groups Front panel input and output connectors rear panel input
336. t oscilloscope input impedance to 50Q 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0 1V Adjustment 5 Adjust C1061 for the best flatness Updating 8102 Firmware A EEN Only qualified persons may perform Firmware updates DO NOT even attempt to perform this operation unless you were trained and certified by Tabor as you may inflict damage on the instrument Always verify with the factory that you have the latest firmware file before you start with your update Before you update the firmware of your 8102 check the revision level which is installed in your instrument Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem The revision level of your firmware can be displayed as shown in Figure 7 3 To access this screen select the TOP menu then select the Utility soft key and scroll down to the System option Press Enter and the screen will show with the system information Check both the Software Version and the Version Date as both should match with the latest release 7 49 8101 8102 User Manual 7 50 1 TEE MENU ke E 1 00M FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 a S SYNC OUT CH1 CONTINUOUS ASE MODI FUNC PULSE POS o CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT TYPE BIT PATTERN OFF PROGRAM ON OFF 2 OUTPUT SYNC m CICICIE ven CICIC IE 79 4 Serial N
337. t select the pulse function and adjusts the pulse parameters The pulses are generated digitally suing the arbitrary waveform memory and digital computation and therefore there are some limitations to the minimum to maximum range that must be observed The pulse design limitations are given in Appendix A The various parameters that control the digital pulse generator features are described below Pulse Pararneters Figure 4 12 the Digital Pulse Generator Panel Pulse Mode The Pulse Mode group has controls to turn on pulse generator functions select of the output generates single or double pulse shape and selects the pulse polarity from one of the Normal Complemented and Inverted options Pulse Parameters There are two types of pulse parameters the Shared parameters are common to both channels so modification of one of these parameters affects both channels simultaneously The shared parameters are Period Rise Time High Time and Fall time There are also other parameters that can be programmed individually for each channel These are Delay High Level and Low level Programming channel 1 parameters do not affect channel 2 parameters and visa versa To display and modify parameters click on the and next to the required parameter change and modify time per your requirements The range of each parameter is specified in Appendix A ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels The System tab provides access to a group of panels that c
338. t size is 16 points Information on how to partition the memory define segment length and download waveform data to the 8102 is given in the following paragraphs Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands Table 5 4 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default TRACe DATA lt data_array gt DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1 2 e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 DELete NAME 1 to 10k ALL SELect 1 to 10k 1 SEGMent DATA lt data_array gt TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt Description This command will download waveform data to the 8102 memory Waveform data is loaded to the 8102 using high speed binary transfer A special command is defined by IEEE STD 488 2 for this purpose High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data As an example the next command will download to the generator an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe 42048 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data 1024 waveform points into the active memory segment The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 4 designates the number of digits that follow e 2048 is the even number
339. t the need to download waveform Control coordinates to the instrument You can also modify the parameters Commands for each waveform to a shape suitable for your application Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 3 Instrument Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 TRlangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 SQUare DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 PULSe DELay 0 to 99 999 10 WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 DAMP DELay 0 to 99 99 0 TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 99 60 TRAiling 0 to 99 99 30 SINC NCYCle 4 to 100 10 GAUSsian EXPonent 10 to 200 20 EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 1 DC AMPLitude 8 to 8 5 5 21 8101 8102 User Manual FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC EXPo nential GAUSsian NOISe DC This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector Description Parameters Name Type Default SINusoid Discrete SIN TRlangle Discrete SQUare Discrete PULSe Discrete RAMP Discrete SINC Discrete EXPonential Discrete GAUSsian Discrete DC Discrete NOISe Discrete Response Description Selects the sine waveform from the built in librar
340. t time you launch ArbConnection the opening screen will have the Main panel open Click on other buttons and interactively get the feel how ArbConnection opens and closes control panels ArbConnection s main purpose is controlling 8102 functions and parameters The 8102 can generate standard waveforms from a built in library arbitrary waveforms from user downloaded coordinates modulated waveforms and much more The only way to access all of these features is through software utilities such as Plug Play drivers and soft front panels ArbConnection is built to provide complete control over the 8102 ArbConnection has four main screens control panels waveform composers and various utility control panels The various screen images along with instructions how to access and use them are described below in detail The control panels look and feel just as if you would operate an instrument from its front panel They even look like instrument front panels so operating function and changing parameters is easy and intuitive Let s look at the first panel that shows at the opening screen This panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is called the Main Panel To begin with let s explore the panel controls to see how they feel react and what they do All other panels share almost the same feel so the description of how to operate the Main Panel can serve as general guide for controlling the rest of the panels Looking at the panel you can identify
341. t to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 50Q 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 80MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP80 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 49 100MHz Amplitude Equipment 50Q 20dB Feed through termination Oscilloscope 7 27 8101 8102 User Manual Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Input Impedance 50 ohms Range 100mV 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the 500 20dB Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 100MHz Ch1 Output On Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP81 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen Setup 50 Frequency Flatness Modulation Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Modulation ON Modulation Sweep Start Freq 1MHz Stop Freq 100MHz Sweep Time 1ms Marker 1MHz Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Q 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0 1V Adjustment 5 Adjust C1016 for the best flatness 7 28 Channel 2 Adjustments Base Line Offset Adjustments Setup 1 Setup 2 Adjustments
342. t with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On CAL SERV 12 Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP42 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV 7 38 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 25 1V Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP43 for DMM reading of 353 5mV 3mV Setup 26 500mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows Frequency 1kHz Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP44 for DMM reading of 176 7mV 1 5mV Setup 27 100mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1
343. te action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Wave Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Sine will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files Also use this command to print the active waveform or exit the wave composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels New Waveform The New Waveform Ctrl N command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New Waveform command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform Ctrl O command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer The Open Waveform command can convert ASCII CSV comma delimited text PRN space delimited text and 0 LeCroy binary format The Open dialog box in Figure 4 16 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment The file that is opened is automatically converted to wa
344. ter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus 3 25 8101 8102 User Manual 3 26 Offset programs the offset of the output waveform Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus Phase sets the start phase of the output waveform You will not be able to see any change in the waveform if you generate a continuous sine waveform however if you place the generator in triggered run mode the output will start the sine wave generation from a point defined by the Phase parameter The start phase is programmed in units of degree Reset Parameters Resets the sine wave parameters to their original factory defaults Square Wave The square waveform is a commonly used waveform The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore the square waveform is generated with 1000 points accuracy up to about frequency setting of 250kHz output frequency sample clock frequency number of points As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically There are certain menus that provide access to square waveform parameters These are Frequency programs the frequency of the square waveform Note that at low frequencies up to about
345. th other network devices BASE MODE SYNC OU CONTINUOUS UT FUNC MOD Pos a CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 MODULATION ON a am linen ane JON y JODA opon DOE Tee onm Ke MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG O O O e Figure 2 13 LAN Configuration Screen There are three LAN parameters in this screen that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting These are described below Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application e IP address The unique computer readable address of a device on your network An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods for example 192 160 0 233 Refer to the next section Choosing a Static IP Address e Subnet mask A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network e Gateway IP The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway which is a connection between two networks If your network does not have a gateway set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 2 15 8101 8102 User Manual Choosing a Static IP Address For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator If you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network you must choose IP addresses carefully Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device Also have the network administrator assi
346. the re trigger feature scroll down to the Re Trigger State field and press Enter Use the down key to change the sate to ON 3 19 8101 8102 User Manual Gated Mode 3 20 and press enter again to lock in the state position The re trigger time field then becomes active Scroll down to the re trigger time field and press enter Modify the time to match your requirement and press Enter again Note that the minimum re trigger interval is 200ns and can be increased to over 20 seconds with 20ns resolution When set to gated mode the 8102 output remains at a DC level as long as the rear panel TRIG IN signal remains inactive The output gates on and off between two transitions either positive or negative depending on the slope setting Only the rear panel TRIG IN connector can be used for operating the gated mode When placed in gated mode the generator idles on a DC level until the first gate on transition The signal will complete after the gate off transition and the generator will once again resume DC level equal to the last point of the waveform There are two parameters you can adjust for the gated mode Source defines the gating signal source Since the gated run mode relies on hardware transitions only EXT is a valid source for the gated mode Slope defines if the generator is gating on and off on positive or negative transitions Level sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector S
347. the working memory can be divided to 2k segments and different waveforms loaded in each segment Any segment is available at the output connector only if it has been selected to be the active segment The segment selection field lets you select any segment from 1 to n regardless if it contains waveform data or not so be careful when you select a segment number as it may be empty and no output will be generated Delete Segments Allows distractive removal of all segments from the memory In fact this command does not erase the memory but only removes the table that defines start and stop for each segment location If you have recorded your segment sizes you can always re define the segment table which will restore the original waveforms in each segment There is however no way back if you perform a download action after you delete the segment table Generating Modulated Waveforms ke FF 1 00MH FUNCTION ARSITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Sample Clock Amplitude Active Segment FR BASE MODE FUNC ARB POS amp LEVEL 1 60U 8 o 2 es RUN BURST ke pS Lu h Wi bh Y bh Pa Va 50N TTL son Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms ON OFF PUTPUT SYNC PROGRAM c HI CH2 sz CH1 VA VAS 2 35Vpp d O JOE PER Ka 75 an s bo Upp Sms MENU LOCAL Em es 4 SYNC OUT BURST EXT 10 Figure 15 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters Utilizing DDS direct digital synt
348. through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch1 Output On Ch1 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP36 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV 7 23 8101 8102 User Manual Pulse Response Adjustments Setup 39 Setup 40 Flatness Adjustments 7 24 The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times as well as the aberrations are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Pulse Response Amplifier Out Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Square Amplitude 1 5V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input Set oscilloscope input impedance to 500 3 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20mV Adjustment 4 Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 5 Adjust RV3 for best pulse response 4ns type 5 aberrations Pulse Response Amplifier In Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Square Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the o
349. tion Preparation 1 Setup the 8102 for GPIB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2 Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows SCLK 250 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Output On 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 512k points Waveform Sine wave Test Procedure 1 Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail USB Control Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnection Preparation 1 Setup the 8102 for USB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2 Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows SCLK 250 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Output On 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 512k points Waveform Sine wave Test Procedure 1 Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail 6 30 Performance Checks Test Procedures LAN Control Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnection Preparation 1 Setup the 8102 for USB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2 Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input 3 Configure the 8102 as follows SCLK 250 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Output On 4 Using ArbCon
350. tions has additional auxiliary function that can transform the instrument to one stand alone full featured instrument Digital Pulse Generator Operating instructions for the auxiliary function are given in Chapter 3 The following describes this auxiliary function in general The digital pulse generator auxiliary function transforms the 8102 into a pulse generator with the capability to generate pulses exactly as they would be generated by a stand alone pulse generator instrument When using this function one could program all pulse parameters in timing units All pulse parameters are programmable including period pulse width rise and fall times delay polarity and more Operating instructions for the digital pulse generator are given in Chapter 3 8102 front panel and ArbConnection control panel examples for the digital pulse generator function are shown in figures 1 13 and 1 14 respectively 1 23 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF CH oz OUTPUT SYNC MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Pulse Mode f Pulse Parameters Figure 1 14 ArbConnection Digital Pulse Generator Panel Example 1 24 Output State Customizing the Output Units Programming the Model 8102 Getting Started 1 Output State The main outputs can be turned on or off The internal circuit is disconnected from the output connector by a mechanical switch relay This feature is useful for connecting the main outputs to an analog bus For safety reasons
351. to find your way around ArbConnection s menus Once you are familiar with the basics you ll continue to learn about features programming and editing commands If you can t find the answer to a question in this guide call your distributor or the Tabor customer support service near you and we ll gladly assist you with your problems For the Advanced User If you are already familiar with computer conventions and have basic knowledge of Windows programming you may want to skip some of the following paragraphs This manual uses certain typographical conventions to make it easier for you to follow instructions These conventions are de scribed in the following Enter or Press the Enter or Return key Esc Press the Escape key Alt F Press the Alt key and the key that follows simultaneously In this example the key that follows is F Ctrl S Press the Control key and the letter that follows simulta neously In this example the letter is S The control key also appears in the menus as a target sign 1 J gt 4 Press the Arrow key with the symbol pointing in the direction specified e up down left or right lt gt Press the key for the character or word enclosed in angle brackets In this case the Plus sign key ArbConnection 4 The Opening Screen The Opening Invoke ArbConnection by double clicking on the icon If you cannot find the icon on your desktop click on Start Programs and Screen ArbConn
352. to trigger parameters re trigger on off and re trigger parameters C Gated Selects the gated run mode Provides access to gating parameters p Burst Selects the triggered run mode Provides access to counted burst parameters re trigger on off and re trigger parameters D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial 3 9 8101 8102 User Manual Table 4 Front Panel Utility and Output Menus Soft TOP 2nd Level 3rd Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes C Utility Provides access to factory reset display customization remote setup and system parameters Factory Reset Allows reset of all 8102 parameters to factory default values Customize Provides access to display customization horizontal units clock sources load impedance dial direction and display brightness System Displays all 8102 system parameters including serial number installed option last calibration date Also monitors internal temperature rise Remote Setup Provides access to selecting the remote interface Available interfaces are LAN USB and GPIB A Select interface Selects between GPIB USB and LAN B GPIB Programs GPIB address C USB Display information on the USB ID D LAN Programs LAN IP address D Outputs Provides access to output on off control filter on off an
353. tor has been turned off Every time you turn on the instrument the non volatile memory updates the front panel setting with modes parameters and waveforms from its last setting with only one exception for safety reasons the outputs remain off even if they were turned on before powering down the 8102 After power on the instrument displays information messages and updates the display with the last setup information The 8102 can always be reset to its default values Information on how to restore default parameters is given below If you are not yet fully familiar with front panel operation of the 8102 you may find yourself locked into a dead end situation where nothing operates the way it should The fastest way to restore the generator to a known state is by resetting the instrument to factory defaults Observe Figure 3 1 and reset parameters to factory defaults as follows 1 Press the Utilities soft key 2 Scroll down to the or 3 Press button 3 to restore factory defaults Table 3 1 summarizes factory defaults for the most common parameters A complete list of all parameters their defaults as well as their maximum and minimum values is given in Chapter 4 Using the Instrument Power On Reset Defaults PROGRAM ON OFF MENU 2729 00MH FUNCION ARSITRARY GENERATOR 155102 Fon oe foureur smc JOA A TAE A j Factory Reset y MON Customize Coun ua z System f 47 Remote Setup M 1
354. tput 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns 5 of setting All trigger parameters such as level slope jitter etc apply Both channels share sweep parameters Sine wave Linear or log Up or Down 10 mHz to 100 MHz 1usto40s Programmable marker at a selected frequency Both channels share FM parameters Sine wave Sine square triangle Ramp 10 Hz to 100 MHz 10 mHz to 350 kHz Up to 50 MHz Programmable at selectable a frequency Both channels share AM parameters except envelop waveform and modulation depth Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz Sine square triangle Ramp 10 mHz to 1 MHz 0 to 100 Both channels share FSK parameters Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 1 bit sec to 10 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Programmable marker at a selected step 8101 8102 User Manual PSK Channel Dependency Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Phase Shift Range Baud Range PSK Data Bits Length Marker Output Front Panel Outputs Main Outputs Connector Protection Standby Sync Outputs Connector Level Sync Type Position GENERAL GPIB Information Connector GPIB Revision SCPI Revision Logical Address Settings DMA Ethernet Connector Physical Layer IP address Baud Rate Protocol USB Connector Specifications Protocol Both channels share PSK parameters Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 0 to 359 99 1bits sec to 10Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Programmable marker at a selected step Front panel BNC each channel
355. tput connectors must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to impedance mismatch Proper termination is also required for accurate amplitude levels at the output connectors Use 500 cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors Always place the 50 2 termination at the far end of the cables Note that the display reading of the amplitude level is calibrated to 3 3 8101 8102 User Manual Input Output Protection Power On Reset Defaults 3 4 show the actual level on the load when the load impedance is exactly 50 Q There are cases however where the load has different impedance so in that case the display reading will indicate a different reading than the actual amplitude level on the load The 8102 provides a customization menu where the load impedance can be changed from 50 to other values Information how to customize the 8102 is given later in this chapter The Model 8102 provides protection for internal circuitry connected to input and output connectors Refer to the specifications in Appendix A to determine the level of protection associated with each input or output connector A WARNING The outputs can only be connected to resistive loads Connecting the 8102 to inductive or capacitive load may damage the output and void the warranty on the instrument The 8102 utilizes non volatile memory backup that automatically stores the last setup before the genera
356. triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform Response The 8102 will return SIN TRI SQU or RAMP depending on the selected function shape setting AM FREQuency lt am_freq gt Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt am_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform 1e6 in units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating waveforms only is affected Response The 8102 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned AM DEPth lt depth gt Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library 5 41 8101 8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt depth gt Oto 100 Numeric 50 Programs the depth of the modulating waveform in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present modulating depth value Sweep Modulation Use the following command for programming the sweep Programming parameters Sweep control is internal The frequency will sweep from start to stop freque
357. tronics Ltd Tel Hanan Israel at 972 4 821 3393 or via fax at 972 4 821 3388 We can be reached at sup port tabor co il Limitation of Warranty Tabor Electronics Ltd shall be released from all obligations under this warranty in the event repairs or modifi cations are made by persons other than authorized Tabor Electronics service personnel or without the written consent of Tabor Electronics Tabor Electronics Ltd expressly disclaims any liability to its customers dealers and representatives and to users of its product and to any other person or persons for special or consequential damages of any kind and from any cause whatsoever arising out of or in any way connected with the manufacture sale handling repair maintenance replacement or use of said products Representations and warranties made by any person including dealers and representatives of Tabor Elec tronics Ltd which are inconsistent or in conflict with the terms of this warranty including but not limited to the limitations of the liability of Tabor Electronics Ltd as set forth above shall not be binding upon Tabor Elec tronics Ltd unless reduced to writing and approved by an officer of Tabor Electronics Ltd Except as stated above Tabor Electronics Ltd makes no warranty express or implied either in fact or by operation of law statutory or otherwise and except to the extent stated above Tabor Electronics Ltd shall have no liability under any warranty express o
358. ts from 16 to 512kpoints ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom waveforms either freehand with equations or built in functions or with imported waveforms Modulated Waveforms General Description Carrier Waveform Modulation Source Inter Channel Phase Relationship Run Modes Interrupted Modulation Carrier Idle Mode Run Mode Advance Source Trigger Delay Trigger input to modulation output Resolution Error Appendices Specifications Sinewave Internal Channel 2 output is phase offset by 90 relative to channel 1 output Off outputs CW Continuous Triggered Delayed Trigger Re trigger Burst and Gated On or Off programmable Front panel manual trigger Rear panel TRIG IN Software commands 0 200 ns to 20 s system delay 20 ns 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns 5 of setting Re trigger Delay Modulation end to modulation restart 200 ns to 20 s Resolution Error Trigger Parameters Sweep Channel Dependency Swept Waveform Sweep Step Sweep Direction Sweep Range Sweep Time Marker Output FM Channel Dependency Modulated Waveform Modulating Waveforms Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Frequency Range Peak Deviation Marker Position AM Channel Dependency Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Envelop Waveform Envelop Frequency Modulation Depth FSK Channel Dependency Shifted Waveform Carrier Shifted Frequency Range Baud Range FSK Data Bits Length Marker Ou
359. tself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 0 End Point Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points The example below shows five sine cycles Amplitude 16 bit of vertical define 65 536 incremental steps The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine The example is showing sine waveform with maximum peak to peak amplitude Any number below the maximum will generate an attenuated sine 4 31 8101 8102 User Manual Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start The example shows start phase of 90 Power The example shows sine cubed Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 10 x Vertical Scale 64kPts SkPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div A Zb EI 7 4 Wavelength 1024 halve seg 2 R Anchor 499 L p Anchor Start pts 10 End pts 499 Default y EE Amplitude Max E 0000 Cancel Min 20000 OK m Wave Properties Cycles E Start Phase so Power E q Figure 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine wav
360. ual level on the load If you know your load impedance you can adjust the display to show the exact level on your load The adjustment as you can see in Figure 3 33 can be made separately for each channel The default load impedance setting is 500 PROGRAM ON OFF eech 223 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 155102 eas cz output sc Horizontal Unit Use q Oda CIE aj DIE e kee CIGR x ioe Dom Bt Back esc ee MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG 6 0 0 Dial Direction _ Forward Figure 33 Customizing the Output Parameters The 8102 has an internal temperature sensor that allows monitoring of the internal temperature In cases where you suspect that the instrument is getting too warm or malfunction occurs you can monitor the internal temperature to see if the cause is excessive heat inside the unit The temperature information is also available to read from a remote interface so constant control over system temperature can be maintained Temperature reading is automatically read and displayed every time you select the System display from the Utility menus Figure 3 34 is an example of the System menu showing the temperature inside the unit as 35 C To update the reading press the numeric 0 button 3 57 8101 8102 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF E 1 00MH FUNCTION ARBITRARY GENERATOR 1455102 ou ou fou TPUT SYNC 17 Mar 2007 12 21 Nat calibrated MENU LOCAL M
361. ucture of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 8102 is given in Chapter 5 Information in this Chapter will give you some general idea what arbitrary waveforms are all about loj x 1024 ctiveseg 1 Default e Auto R Anchor 1023 Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands al Cancel amp sin 10 omg p p f 0 3 kK Vertical Scale 64kPts SkPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 14 the Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Instrument Generating Arbitrary Waveforms What Are Arbitrary Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in a working memory The working memory is connected Waveforms to a digital to analog converter DAC and a sample clock generator is clocking the data points one at a time to the output circuit In slow motion the output generates a waveform that resembles the look of a staircase In reality the DAC is generating amplitude hops that depend on bit arrangement and sample clock speed The working memory has two major properties vertical resolution and memory depth Vertical Resolution This term defines the precision along the vertical axis of which data points can be placed and generated by the DAC The 8102 is using 16 bit DAC s to generate arbitrary waveforms Converting 16 bits to prec
362. umber 0000666 Software Yersion 1 02 7 xY ersion Date 17 Mar 2007 12 21 m Calibration Date Not calibrated Installed Memory 512k Pts per channel lt i Lo ES Q l s Temperature 35 0 C NOTE Monitors the internal tenper ature Press Di Back esc o update the temperature reading MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG O Figure 7 3 Software Version Screen ei NOTE Firmware updates are performed with the LAN set as the active interface and with the 8102 communicating with the PC through the network To update the 8102 firmware you will have to run the NETConfig utility If you do not have this utility installed on your computer run the installation procedure from the enclosed CD You will not be able to update firmware without the NETConfig utility To invoke this utility complete the following steps 1 Turn power OFF on your 8102 2 Click on NETConfig shortcut on the desktop or select Start Programs Tabor Electronics NETConfig NETConfig 1 0 The NETConfig window lists Tabor devices found on your subnet Figure 7 4 shows an example of this display 3 Click on the Use wait message to select this option as shown in Figure 7 4 Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware TE NETConfig Run IP address hostname Ethernet address Serial number Model Iw Use wait message Refresh il Close Figure 7 4 The NETConfig Utility 4 Turm power ON on you
363. umbers on Figure 3 3 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 While not editing any parameter select the channel you want to turn on using the PROGRAM CH1 or CH2 keys 2 Press ON OFF OUTPUT or SYNC to toggle main and sync output on and off 1 2 o AAA OA oooga Ve ek Channel 1 Output AS Filter Kostis SYNC Pulse Output ON Source CH1 EDER EE Position o Tal S NONE BASE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC STD POS a LEVEL 1 60U RUN TRIG SRC CH1 SLOPE POSITIVE Ls a Figure 3 3 Enabling and Disabling the Outputs Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 3 Press TOP to display the root menu 4 Press Outputs to open the Outputs dialog box as shown in Figure 3 3 5 Use the dial or arrow keys to access the required field Focus is on a filed that is painted orange 6 To edit the field press Enter The edited field will turn white with orange borders 7 Use the dial or arrow keys to change the field 8 Press Enter again to lock in the setting 3 11 8101 8102 User Manual Selecting a Waveform Type 3 12 MENU There are four main types of waveforms that the 8102 can produce Standard Arbitrary and Modulated waveforms Standard and modulated waveforms are computed
364. used to trigger the instrument When EXT is selected triggers commands from a remote interface are ignored EXT is the default trigger source When selecting the Bus as a trigger source the rear panel TRIG IN connector and the front panel MAN TRIG button are disabled and only trigger commands from a remote interface are accepted by the instrument Make sure that the appropriate trigger source is selected if you mix remote and local operation Mixed trigger advance source defines special trigger behavior where the 8102 expects to first receive remote bus trigger and only then accept hardware triggers The first time that the 8102 is placed in this mode all EXT rear and front panel hardware triggers are ignored until a remote TRG is issued Following the first software trigger subsequent triggers from the remote interface software are ignored and only rear and front panel triggers are accepted by the instrument Table 1 2 Trigger Source Options Summary Trigger Source Description Status Option External Interface trigger commands Disabled Rear panel TRIG IN connector Active Front panel MAN TRIG button Active Bus Interface trigger commands Active Rear panel TRIG IN connector Disabled Front panel MAN TRIG button Disabled Mixed Interface trigger commands Active Rear panel TRIG IN connector Active Front panel MAN TRIG button Active First trigger from BUS only subsequent triggers from EXT only
365. ustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP55 for DMM reading of 35 35mV 0 3mV Setup 38 50mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feed through termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100mV 2 Connectthe 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 500 Feed through termination 3 Configure the 8102 as follows CW Frequency 1kHz Mode Modulation Ch2 Output On Ch2 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment 4 Adjust CAL SETUP56 for DMM reading of 17 67mV 0 15mV The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times as Pulse Response well as the aberrations are within the specified range Use this Adjustments procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Setup 39 Pulse Response Amplifier Out Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 8102 as follows Function Square Amplitude 1 5V 2 Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Q 7 44 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20mV Adjustment 5 Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6 Adjust RV4 for best pulse response 4ns type 5 aberrations Setup 40 Pulse Resp
366. utility is part of AroConnection and is called The Waveform Composer This program gives you tools to create definitions for arbitrary waveforms lt can also convert coordinates from other products such as oscilloscopes and use them directly as waveform data The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create edit and download waveforms to the 8102 using the Waveform Composer To launch the wave composer point and click on the Wave tab in 4 25 8101 8102 User Manual File Edit View Wave Download About S i DG DH Be w e SE VI Ei SR Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 2 Ka E om CH2 L Anchor 0 Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div the Panels bar Figure 4 15 shows an example of the wave composer The Wave Composer has main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 15 throughout the description of these sections 10 x R Anchor 1023 Figure 4 15 the Wave Composer Opening Screen The Commands bar File Commands 4 26 The commands bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immedia
367. v format and can later be saved as a standard ArbConnection file Save Waveform The Save Waveform Ctrl S command will store your active waveform in your 8102 directory as a binary file with an wav extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page 4 27 8101 8102 User Manual Edit Commands 4 28 Look in o Example Waves WS8102 e ES Half Gaus Pinverted Gaus Mixed sincs Mixed Waveforms sin tri File name Files of type Binary way y 2x Binary wav ASCII space delimited asc Comma delimited csw Comma delimited txt Figure 4 16 the Open Waveform Dialog Box Exit The Exit command ends the current Wave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes The Edit commands are used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the screen
368. ve it a little amplitude it might help so do it now exactly as follows Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p There you go You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points p is the equation variable remember If you want to create 10 sine waveforms you should multiply p by 10 Try this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p 10 ArbConnection 4 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor So far you have learned how to create two simple waveforms Equation Samples straight lines and trigonometric functions Let s see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p l0 8 p 4000 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 22 File Edit View ad About Anchor p Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuste RS 19 Preview D uig ll wi K 2 Start pts 19 Max 32767 Cycles Manual Scale review SE Ka CH1 CH2 End pts 1023 Min 32768 1 Auto Deg 0 5 Equation J Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands anes hi 2000 sinfomg p 1 0 8 p 4000 e OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 22 an Equation Editor Example Now let s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and di
369. ves Sine Frequency 10 kHz Trigger Period 1ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail FM Burst Standard Waveforms 6 20 Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base Sampling Rate Trace A View Trigger source Amplitude 0 2 ms 50 MS s at least Jitter Type FREQ CLK Channel 2 positive slope 1 V div 2 Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 8102 channel 2 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency Run Mode Waveform Amplitude 1 kHz Continuous Squarewave Adjust to TTL level on 5 Q 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows Waveform Modulation Modulated FM Modulation Run Mode Burst Burst Carrier Freq 5 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation Sync Output Test Procedure 500 kHz On On 1 Verify Burst FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Burst of 5 Sine waveforms Sine Frequency 10 kHz Burst Period 1 ms Max A 1 25 MHz Min A 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Gated FM Standard Equipment Oscillosco
370. when it is being generated at the output connector The waveforms that reside in the built in library are referred to as Standard Waveforms The meaning of this term is that these waveforms have standard characteristics that is commonly known and or associated with these waveforms For example sine waveform has known spectral and power distribution that could be compared to published mathematical equations The quality of the generator determines how closeness of the waveform generation to its pure mathematical properties The 8102 has a library of 11 standard waveforms Sine Triangle Square Ramp pulse sinc Gaussian Exponential DC and Noise Some of the parameters for these waveforms can be modified to fine tune the waveforms for specific applications For example changing the sine start phase of the 2 channel can create a 2 phase sine system The standard waveforms and their parameters that can be modified are summarized in the following paragraphs Using the Instrument 3 Sine ES Triangle Pulse 9 Sinc Amplitude Gaussian o Exponential BASE MODE SYNC OUT CONTINUOUS FUNC STD POS 6 CLOCK REF EXT RUN CONT SRC CH1 PATTERN OFF Figure 13 Built in Standard Waveforms Menu Sine Wave The sine waveform is the most commonly used waveform The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore the sine waveform is generated with 1000 points accuracy up to about frequency setting of
371. when power is first applied to the chassis the main output is always off There are some parameters that could be customized for easier fit of the output These are horizontal time units load impedance 10 MHz reference source and sample clock source Information on the customization options is given in chapter 3 All instrument functions parameters and modes can be accessed through remote commands There are a number of ways to talk to the instrument They all require that an appropriate software driver be installed in the host computer the rest is a matter of practice and knowledge of the language in use There are other system considerations like address selection that have to be settled before programming the instrument These topics are discussed in later chapters Low level programming of the Model 8102 is done using SCPI commands Programming aspects are covered in Chapters 4 High level drivers like IVI drivers are beyond the scope of this manual Contact your Tabor representative for more information about high level drivers for the Model 8102 1 25 8101 8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank 1 26 Chapter 2 Configuring the Instrument Title Page Installation IVGINIGW ateo titi 2 2 Unpacking and Initial Inspection Must an tii ii 2 2 Safety te EE 2 2 Performance RI 2 2 Power Req iremeniS asias 2 3 Grounding Requirements n e E nt he es Ngee AE 2 3 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Ship
372. which is supplied with the instrument Information how to install the driver is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This 24 pin connector accepts standard GPIB cable The GPIB address is configured using the front panel utility menu The 8102 conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard Programming protocol is SCPI version 1993 0 GPIB cables are available separately from your Tabor dealer This 3 prong AC LINE connector accepts ac line voltage The 8102 senses the line voltage and sets the appropriate range automatically Therefore the traditional line voltage selector is not available on the rear panel To avoid potentially hazardous situations always connect the center pin to mains ground using the line cord that is supplied with the instrument The AC fuse protects the 8102 from excessive current Always replace the fuse with the exact type and rating as printed on the rear panel If the fuse blows again after replacement we recommend that you refer your instrument immediately to the nearest Tabor service center 8101 8102 User Manual Run Modes Continuous Triggered The 8102 can be programmed to operate in one of four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and counted burst There are two other modes that can operate in conjunction with the basic four run modes these are Delayed Trigger and Re Trigger The run modes are common to all of the 8102 waveform output however they may behave differently for arbitrary and
373. will have no further effect on the display If you do not want to use the dial you can still change the display reading by using the f or Y keys or simply type the required number using the standard keyboard features ei NOTE After you change the displayed readout the 8102 will be updated with the new parameter only after you press the Execute button Digital Display The display is used for displaying and reading various 8102 parameters just as you would use it on your instrument lay Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 8102 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will 4 7 8101 8102 User Manual The Operation Panels e Operation Standard Arbitrary Trigger gt Auxilary gt Composers Figure 4 3a the Operation Panels Main 4 8 update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Operation tab provides access to a group of panels
374. xternal trigger source remote commands are ignored and the instrument monitors the TRIG IN connector or the MAN TRIG control When in BUS the hardware inputs are ignored and only remote commands can trigger the instrument The MIX is a special trigger advance mode that senses the first remote trigger and only then enables the hardware sources There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode Source defines the trigger source EXT enables the rear panel trigger input BUS enables remote commands and MIX enables remote command and after the first trigger enables the EXT source Slope defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Level sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector Signal transition to above the trigger level will trigger the instrument When the slope is set to negative transitions to below the trigger level will trigger the instrument Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input Trigger Delay defines the state of the delayed trigger function Using the Instrument Selecting the Modulation Run Modes Re Trigger defines the state of the re trigger function You may use the triggered mode to trigger standard arbitrary sequenced and modulated waveforms However note that in modulation mode the output generate CW frequency before and after the trigger event The Trigger run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 9 Co
375. y Selects the triangular waveform from the built in library Selects the square waveform from the built in library Selects the pulse waveform from the built in library Selects the ramp waveform from the built in library Selects the sinc waveform from the built in library Selects the exponential waveform from the built in library Selects the gaussian waveform from the built in library Selects the DC waveform from the built in library Selects the noise waveform from the built in library The 8102 will return SIN TRI SQU PULS RAMP SINC EXP GAUS NOIS or DC depending on the present 8102 setting SINusoid PHASe lt phase gt Description This command programs start phase of the standard sine waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value 5 22 Description Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees Sine phase can be programmable with resolution of 0 05 throughout the entire frequency range of the sine waveform Remote Programming Reference 5 Standard Waveforms Control Commands TRlangle PHASe lt phase gt Description This command programs start phase of the standard triangular waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the
376. y DOWN reverses the sweep direction so the output sweeps from stop frequency to start frequency Start Frequency defines the frequency value of which the generator will start its sweep Note that the sweep start can be at a higher frequency value depending on the sweep direction setting Stop Frequency defines the frequency value of which the generator will stop its sweep Note that the sweep stop can be ata lower frequency value depending on the sweep direction setting Using the Instrument Using the Auxiliary Functions Sweep Time defines the time that will lapse from sweep start to sweep stop frequencies Sweep time is programmable from 1 4 us to 40 s Marker defines a frequency of which when transitioned through will output a marker pulse at the SYNC output connector The default position of the marker is the sweep start frequency Trigger Baseline defines the idle state of the sweep output when placed in trigger mode There are two options continuous carrier or dc level The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered generates the sweep waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform Selecting dc the output generates dc level until triggered Generates the sweep waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Offset defin
377. y define the phase difference between these values and not fixed values of which the generator will adhere to Baud defines the rate of which the phase is toggled The rate can be programmed within the range of 1 bits s to 10 Mbits s Marker defines an index point in the PSK sequence where the SYNC output will generate a marker pulse Using the Instrument 3 Generating Modulated Waveforms Trigger Baseline defines the idle state of the PSK output when placed in trigger mode There are two options continuous carrier or dc level The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered generates the PSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform Selecting dc the output generates dc level until triggered Generates the PSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform Amplitude defines the carrier amplitude level The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another Offset defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another 0 Delete 1 Clear All 0 _Clearan gt Import 1 Export 1 0 1 d Data Note eS Shift data is construed from 0 and 1 Download O Carrier phase 1 Shift phase Close Figure 24 PSK Control Data String Example NAV IECH s1 1 BMHz Start o Dees Phase BASE MODE SYN
378. you do before you program amplitude and offset setting is define which of the channels is being programmed The active channel is displayed at the upper right corner of the LCD display Window Offset When the display shows at the upper right corner you are currently programming channel 1 parameters Keypads 1 and 2 are used as hot keys for channel selection While not editing any parameter press key 2 to program channel 2 parameters When the display shows at the upper right corner you can proceed with channel 2 programming The amplitude and offset parameters are duplicated in multiple screens however when changed for a specific function shape the new value is updated on all screens for all other function shapes Refer to Figure 3 7 and modify amplitude and offset using the procedure as described below The index numbers in Figure 3 7 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Amplitude soft key button Press Enter to edit the Amplitude value Use the numeric keypad to program the new value Press m for mV or x1 for volts to select the suffix letter Press Enter to lock in the value gi So o 3 15 8101 8102 User Manual Alternately you can modify the amplitude value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter Offset is programmed the same way as amplitude except select Offset from the soft key menus to ac

UNIVERSAL THREE PHASE

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents